Instruction Manual
Digital Cinema Camera
PUB. DIE-0441-001B
2
Important Usage Instructions
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO DRIPPING OR
SPLASHING.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK AND TO REDUCE ANNOYING INTERFERENCE, USE THE
RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY.
COPYRIGHT WARNING:
Unauthorized recording of copyrighted materials may infringe on the rights of copyright owners and be
contrary to copyright laws.
FCC NOTICE
Digital Cinema Camera, EOS C500 / EOS C500
PL Systems.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and use in
accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with
class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC
Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to
the equipment unless otherwise specified in the
manual.
If such changes or modifications should be
made, you could be required to stop operation
of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, USA
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)
The Mains plug is used as the disconnect device. The Mains plug shall remain readily operable to
disconnect the plug in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Danger of explosion if the wrong type of batteries are attached. Use only the same type of batteries.
• Do not expose batteries or product to excessive heat such as the inside of a car under direct sunlight, fire, etc.
EOS C500 / EOS C500 PL / CA-940N / CG-940 identification plate is located on the bottom.
3
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household
waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC)
and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the
Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in
this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery
Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one
basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical
and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste
could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous
substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product
will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste
authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or
visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure, that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point, within an equilateral triangle, is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the product.
4
Important Safety Instructions
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
In these safety instructions the word “apparatus”
refers to the Canon Digital Cinema Camera
EOS C500 / EOS C500 PL and all its accessories.
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other.
A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply
cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Trademark Acknowledgements
• SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
• The CF Logo is a trademark of CompactFlash Association.
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Apple, Mac OS, Final Cut Pro are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Avid, Media Composer and NewsCutter are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. or
its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
• Other names and products not mentioned above may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206.
5
Highlights of the EOS C500/C500 PL
The Canon Digital Cinema Camera EOS C500/C500 PL has been designed with the discerning professional in
mind. It is truly a cinematographer’s camera. The following are just some of the many features that will help turn
your creative vision into reality.
4K Recording System with Cinema Quality
Advanced 4K-compatible Super 35mm CMOS
sensor
The camera is equipped with a Super 35mm CMOS
sensor that captures video at an effective pixel count
of 8.85 megapixels (4096x2160) and offers a center
resolution of 1,800 TV lines
1
. Furthermore, thanks to
Canon’s high-sensitivity and low-noise technology,
the camera can record at an ISO level of 20,000
2
- a
level of sensitivity that must be seen to be believed!
1
Varies depending on the lens used.
2
You can extend the ISO level to 80,000.
Interchangeable lenses
Enjoy the freedom of using interchangeable lenses
to achieve exactly the look you want. The EOS C500
features an EF lens mount allowing you to use over
60 high-quality lenses from the Canon Cinema Lens
series and EF Lens series. The EOS C500 PL
features a PL lens mount, allowing you to use a vast
array of cinematography lenses compatible with a
Canon PL lens mount and other lenses commonly
used in motion picture production.
4K, 2K and MXF modes
In 4K and 2K modes, the camera outputs image
data for recording with an external recorder. In 4K
mode, the camera outputs Canon RAW image data,
which is free of compression noise. In 2K mode, the
camera outputs up to an RGB 4:4:4 12-bit signal. In
MXF mode, the camera records HD audio and video
to CompactFlash (CF) cards. HD recordings are
saved as Material eXchange Format (MXF) files and
are compatible with major non-linear editing (NLE)
software. For example, you can use these MXF files
as proxy video for your NLE software. Furthermore,
even in 4K and 2K modes, the camera can record
MXF files on a CF card.
Multitude of recording options
The camera offers you numerous options when it
comes to the video configuration of your recordings.
When recording in 4K or 2K mode, you can select
the recording mode (RAW, HRAW, 4K1K RAW, RGB
4:4:4 12-bit, RGB 4:4:4 10-bit or YCC 4:2:2 10-bit),
system frequency (59.94 Hz, 50.00 Hz, 24.00 Hz),
resolution (various settings from 1920x1080 to
4096x2160) and frame rate (various settings from
23.98P up to 59.94P). This allows you to select a
video configuration to suit your needs from a total of
46 different combinations. When recording in MXF
mode, you can select the system frequency, bit rate,
resolution and frame rate of your recordings. These
options allow you to choose from a total of 27
different combinations.
Recording media
Because there are two CF card slots, when one CF
card slot becomes full, the recording will
automatically continue on the other one without
interruption when you use relay recording (A 46). In
addition, using double slot recording (A 47) lets
you record the same clip simultaneously to both CF
cards.
3G-SDI and MON. terminals
The camera features dual 3G-SDI terminals (A 41)
that can output 4K or 2K image data to an external
recorder. The dual MON. terminals (A 41) are
HD-SDI terminals that can output YCC 4:2:2 10-bit
2K or full HD video, allowing external live monitoring
during shoots. You can even apply a LUT and use it
for on-set color grading (A 22). Of course, both
sets of terminals also output audio, SMPTE time
code (LTC) and user bit signals. In addition, you can
output the signal from the 3G-SDI terminal with an
extended color space (A 144).
Canon Log gamma for spectacular dynamic range
The Canon Log gamma (A 58) makes full use of
the sensor to give your recordings amazing dynamic
range. In 4K and 2K modes, the camera will always
use Canon Log gamma. In MXF mode, you may
want to use CINEMA preset (A 58) to set the
camera easily and quickly for shooting with Canon
Log gamma.
Operability and Adaptability
Freely customizable compact design
The modular components, including the supplied
handle unit and monitor unit will let you expand and
adapt the configuration to match your shooting
conditions (A 32). The articulated monitor unit can
be rotated 270° for maximum convenience. The
10.1-cm (4-in.) LCD screen with 100% coverage
ensures that you can compose your shots with
ease.
6
Pro-level connectivity
In addition to the 3G-SDI terminals mentioned
previously, the HD/SD SDI terminal can output YCC
4:2:2 10-bit (8-bit effective) HD/SD video as well as
audio and time code signals. Genlock
synchronization (A 88), the TIME CODE terminal
(A 89, 91) and SYNC OUT terminal allow the
camera to be part of any multi-camera shooting
setup.
Customization
The camera features several customization options.
You can assign often-used functions to assignable
buttons (A 111) so that you can call up those
functions with the press of a single button. You can
also register frequently-used menu settings in an
easy-to-access personal menu (My Menu, A 30).
Custom functions (A 123) and custom onscreen
displays (A 124) give you even more freedom to
control many aspects of the camera’s operation.
During MXF mode, with custom picture settings
(A 114), you can enjoy unparalleled image control
to deliver the “look” you want by adjusting
parameters, such as gamma and sharpness. The
custom picture settings can be recorded onto an SD
card, which allows multiple C500 / C500 PL cameras
to use the same settings, or embedded in the
recording itself (A 116, 136, 164).
Remote operation via Wi-Fi
You can attach the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File
Transmitter to the camera and operate it remotely via
Wi-Fi using the Wi-Fi Remote application (A 50).
The Wi-Fi Remote application lets you monitor the
image through live view and remotely control the
focus, shutter speed, ISO speed/gain and other
settings.
Other Features
Special recording modes
The special recording modes (A 105) give you more
creative control over your recordings. You can create
a slow motion or fast motion effect in your
recordings, record a certain number of frames at a
set interval (ideal for nature shots and other subjects
with little movement) or record a certain number of
frames every time you press a button (ideal for stop
motion animation).
Software for aiding the production workflow
The Cinema RAW Development software, which
can be downloaded from your local Canon Web site,
can develop the 4K RAW data recorded with an
external recorder and export it as a standard file type
such as DPX. This helps make a smooth transition to
the color grading process.
Audio
Sound is recorded as 2-channel linear PCM audio
(16-bit/48 kHz). You can use the MIC terminal for
microphones with a Ø 3.5 mm mini-stereo plug or the
two XLR audio input terminals (with phantom power
supply) when recording.
Video scopes
Check the brightness of the image using the
waveform monitor (A 100), the color of the image
using the vectorscope (A 101), or the focus using
the edge monitor (A 101).
7
1. Introduction 11
About this Manual 11
Conventions Used in this Manual 11
Supplied Accessories 13
Names of Parts 14
Monitor Unit 19
Handle Unit 19
4K Workflow Overview 21
Color Grading with the ACES Workflow 22
2. Preparations 23
Preparing the Power Supply 23
Using a Battery Pack 23
Using a Household Power Outlet 25
Turning the Camera On and Off 26
Date, Time and Language Settings 27
Setting the Date and Time 27
Changing the Time Zone 27
Displaying the Date and Time while Recording 28
Changing the Language 28
Using the Menus 29
Selecting an Option from the Menu 29
Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu) 30
Preparing the Camera 32
Preparing the Lens 32
Attaching and Removing the Monitor Unit 35
Using the Viewfinder 36
Using the LCD Panel 37
Adjusting the Viewfinder/LCD Screen 38
Using a Tripod 38
Attaching the Handle Unit 39
Attaching a Shoulder Strap 39
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers 40
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible External
Recorder 41
Preparing Recording Media 43
Inserting a CF Card 43
Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots 44
Removing a CF card 44
Inserting and Removing an SD Card 44
Initializing the Recording Media 45
Switching Between the CF Card Slots 46
Selecting the CF Card Recording Method 46
Checking the Available Recording Time for CF
Cards 47
Recovering Data on the CF Card 47
Adjusting the Black Balance 48
Operating the Camera Remotely 49
Using the RC-V100 Remote Controller 49
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote
Application 50
Preparing the System for Wi-Fi Remote 50
3. Recording 51
Recording Video 51
Preparing to Record 51
Recording 51
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 54
Onscreen Displays 55
Rear Panel Displays 57
Canon Log Gamma and CINEMA Preset 58
Checking Clips Recorded with Canon Log Gamma
(View Assistance) 58
Using the Internal Cooling Fan 59
Video Configuration: Type of Recording,
Resolution and Frame Rate 60
Selecting the Video Configuration for 4K and 2K
Modes 60
Selecting the Video Configuration for MXF
Mode 64
Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC.
Button 66
Using the Direct Setting Mode 66
Shutter Speed 67
Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value 68
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 68
Table of Contents
8
ISO Speed/Gain 70
Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value 70
Using the Control Dial 71
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 71
ND Filter 73
Using the ND Filter 73
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 73
2 Adjusting the Aperture 74
Using the Control Dial 74
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 75
White Balance 76
Setting the White Balance 76
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 77
Adjusting the Focus 79
Adjusting the Focus Manually 79
2 Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 79
Using the Focus Assistance Functions 80
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns 82
Displaying Onscreen Markers 82
Displaying Zebra Patterns 83
Setting the Time Code 84
Selecting the Running Mode 84
Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame 85
Putting the Time Code Display on Hold 85
Setting the User Bit 87
Synchronizing with an External Device 88
Connecting an External Device 88
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock
Synchronization) 88
Time Code Signal Input 89
Reference Video Signal Output 90
Time Code Signal Output 91
Recording Audio 92
Connecting an External Microphone or External
Audio Input Source to the Camera 92
Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR
Terminals 93
Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR
Terminals 94
Adjusting the Audio Level from the MIC
Terminal 95
Monitoring the Audio with Headphones 96
Using Metadata 97
Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF
Utility 97
Setting a User Memo Using Wi-Fi Remote 98
Color Bars/Audio Reference Signal 99
Recording Color Bars 99
Recording an Audio Reference Signal 99
Video Scopes 100
Displaying a Video Scope 100
Configuring the Waveform Monitor 100
Configuring the Vectorscope 101
Configuring the Edge Monitor 101
Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips 102
Adding Shot Marks while Recording 102
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 102
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip
Recorded 103
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote 103
Reviewing an MXF Clip 104
Special Recording Modes 105
Interval Recording Mode 105
Frame Recording Mode 106
Slow & Fast Motion Mode 108
Pre-recording Mode 110
4. Customization 111
Assignable Buttons 111
Changing the Assigned Function 111
Using an Assignable Button 112
Custom Picture Settings 114
Selecting Custom Picture Files 114
Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings 115
Renaming Custom Picture Files 115
Protecting Custom Picture Files 115
Transferring Custom Picture Files 116
Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a
Recording 117
Available Custom Picture Settings 117
Customizing Functions and Onscreen
Displays 123
Customizing Functions 123
Customizing Onscreen Displays 124
9
Saving and Loading Camera Settings 125
Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card 125
Loading Camera Settings from an SD Card 125
5. Playback 127
Playing Back MXF Clips 127
Clip Index Screen 127
Playing Back Clips 128
Onscreen Displays 129
Playback Controls 130
Audio Output 131
MXF Clip Operations 132
Using the Clip Menu 132
Displaying Clip Information 133
Adding $ Marks or % Marks 134
Deleting $ Marks or % Marks 134
Copying Clips 135
Deleting Clips 136
Deleting the User Memo 136
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a
Clip 136
Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks 137
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single
Clip 138
Adding Shot Marks 138
Deleting Shot Marks 139
Changing a Clip’s Thumbnail 139
6. External Connections 141
Video Output Configuration 141
Video Configuration and Video Output
Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes 141
Video Output Configuration for MXF Mode 143
Selecting the Color Space 144
Connecting to an External Monitor 146
Connection Diagram 146
Using the MON. 1 and MON. 2 Terminals 147
Video Output Using ACESproxy10 (for On-set
Color Grading) 148
Using the HD/SD SDI Terminal 149
Using the HDMI OUT Terminal 149
Using the SYNC OUT Terminal 150
Selecting the Resizing Method for SD Video 150
Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on
an External Monitor 151
Developing RAW Clips 152
Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW
Development (Windows) 152
Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW
Development (Mac OS) 152
Viewing the Software Instruction Manual 153
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer 154
Installing Canon XF Utility (Windows) 154
Installing Canon XF Utility (Mac OS) 155
Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals 156
7. Photos 159
Taking Photos 159
Taking Photos in CAMERA Mode 159
Capturing Photos in MEDIA Mode 159
Photo Playback 161
Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen 161
Viewing Photos 161
Photo Operations 162
Using the Photo Menu 162
Deleting Photos 162
Protecting Photos 163
Copying Custom Picture Files 164
Photo Numbering 165
8. Additional Information 167
Menu Options 167
Displaying the Status Screens 178
Troubleshooting 185
List of Messages 188
Handling Precautions 192
Maintenance/Others 196
Optional Accessories 199
1
11
Introduction
About this Manual
Thank you for purchasing the Canon EOS C500/C500 PL. Please read this manual carefully before you use the
camera and retain it for future reference. Should the camera fail to operate correctly, refer to
Troubleshooting
(A 185).
Conventions Used in this Manual
• IMPORTANT: Precautions related to the camera’s operation.
• NOTES: Additional topics that complement the basic operating procedures.
• A: Reference page number.
• 2: Text that applies only to the model shown in the icon.
• The following terms are used in this manual.
“Screen” refers to the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.
“CF card” refers to a CompactFlash (CF) card.
“SD card” refers to an SD or SDHC memory card.
“Recording media” refers to CF cards and SD cards.
• Photographs in the manual are simulated pictures taken with a still camera. Some screenshots have been
altered to make them easier to read.
• Illustrations in the manual show the Canon EOS C500 camera with a Canon EF 50mm f/1.4 USM lens
attached.
About this Manual
12
84
Setting the Time Code
While recording, the camera can generate a time code signal and embed it in your recordings. You can have the
camera output the time code signal from the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals, HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME
CODE terminal (A 91). In addition, you can superimpose the time code on video output from the HDMI OUT
terminal or SYNC OUT terminal. While playing back video recorded on a CF card, you can output the time code
on the CF card from the HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal. Additionally, you can superimpose the time
code on the picture from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal. For recordings with a frame rate of
29.97P, 59.94i or 59.94P, you can also select between a drop frame and non-drop frame time code.
To synchronize the camera s time code to an external time code generator, refer to
Synchronizing with an
External Device
(A 88).
Selecting the Running Mode
During MXF mode, you can select the running mode of the camera s time
code. During 4K and 2K modes, the running mode will be set to [Free
Run] during normal shooting and slow & fast recording mode; it will be set
to [Rec Run] during interval recording and frame recording modes. You
can set the time code s initial value, however, by performing the procedure
in the following section
Setting the Time Code s Initial Value
.
1 Open the time code [Mode] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] >> [Time Code] > [Mode]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
€ If you selected [Regen.], you do not need to perform the rest of this
procedure. If you selected [Preset] and would like to set the time
code s initial value, see the following section
Setting the Time Code s
Initial Value
.
3 After you select [Preset], open the time code [Run] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Run]
4 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Options
Operating modes:
[Preset]: The time code starts from an initial value you can select in
advance. The default initial time code is 00:00:00.00. The time
code s running mode depends on the [Run] setting.
[Rec Run]: The time code runs only while recording so clips
recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have
continuous time codes.
[Free Run]:The time code starts running the moment you press
SET to select this option and keeps running regardless
of the camera s operation.
[Regen.]: The camera will read the selected CF card and the time code will
continue from the last recorded time code on the CF card. The
time code runs only while recording so clips recorded
consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time
codes.
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[Mode]
[Preset]
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[Run]
[Free Run]
Operating modes
indicates that a function is available in the
operating mode (the two icons left of the dividing bar)
and system priority (the three icons to the right of the
dividing bar) indicated and indicates that the
function is not available. For a detailed explanation,
refer to
Turning the Came r a On a nd Off
(A 26) and
Selecting the System Priority
(A 60, 64).
When a function requires the use of the menu,
the quick reference shows the submenus and,
when applicable, the default setting for the menu
item. The example illustration indicates that you
can find the function by selecting the [¤ TC/
UB Setup] menu and then the [Time Code]
menu item.
The arrow is used to abbreviate menu
selections. For a detailed explanation on
how to use the menus, refer to
Using the
Menus
(A 29). For a concise summary
of all available menu options and
settings, refer to the appendix
Menu
Options
(A 167).
When a procedure requires selecting an option,
the available options are listed within or after the
procedure. Brackets [ ] are used to refer to menu
options as they are displayed on screen.
13
Supplied Accessories
Supplied Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the camera.
1
Comes pre-attached to the camera.
2
Used to secure the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter, when it is attached to the camera.
Monitor Unit Handle Unit Body Cap
1
Battery Charger CG-940
(incl. power cord)
BP-955 Battery Pack
(incl. terminal cover)
Eye Cup Viewfinder Cap CA-940N Compact Power Adapter
(incl. power cord)
SS-1200 Shoulder Strap Adapter Base for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)
Tripods
WFT Attachment Bracket
2
Tape Measure Hooks
1
(x 2)
Names of Parts
14
Names of Parts
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
5
4
3
2
1
1514
1 MAGN. (magnification) button (A 80)/
Assignable button 1 (A 111)
2 PEAKING button (A 80) /
Assignable button 2 (A 111)
3 ND FILTER +/- buttons (A 73)
4 ZEBRA button (A 83)/
Assignable button 3 (A 111)
5 WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 100)/
Assignable button 4 (A 111)
6 Q switch (A 26)
7 Tally lamp (A 51)
8 DISP. (display) button (A 55,129)/BATT. INFO
(battery information) button (A 24)
9 SELECT dial/SET button (A 29)
10 Control dial (A 71, 74)
11 STATUS button (A 178)
12 Å (white balance adjustment) button (A 76)/
INDEX button (A 128)/Ñ (stop) button (A 128)
13 u (review recording) button (A 104)/Ò
(play/pause) button (A 128)
14 LENS EXCHANGE button (A 34)/Assignable
button 5 (A 111)
15 LUT (lookup table) button (A 148)/Assignable
button 6 (A 111)
16 CUSTOM PICTURE button (A 114)
15
Names of Parts
31
32
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
29
30
17 MON. (external monitor) terminals 1 and 2 (A 41)
18 WFT terminal (A 50)
19 EXT (modular unit) terminals 1 and 2 (A 35)
20 REMOTE terminal
For connecting commercially available remote
controllers.
21 SYNC OUT (synchronizing signal output) terminal
(A 90,150)
22 HDMI OUT terminal (A 149)
23 GENLOCK terminal (A 88)
24 TIME CODE terminal (A 89, 91)
25 HD/SD SDI terminal (A 149)
26 SD card access indicator (A 44)
27 × (headphone) terminal (A 96)
28 DC IN terminal (A 25)
29 SD card slot (A 44)
30 3G-SDI terminals 1 and 2 (A 41)
31 MIC (microphone) terminal (A 92)
32 GRIP terminal
This terminal is the same as the grip unit
connection terminal on the C300 / C300 PL or
C100 camcorder.
17
Names of Parts
53
54
55
57
58
56
59
63626160
49
52
51
49
50
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
41 Viewfinder unit
42 Viewfinder unit LOCK/RELEASE screw (A 196)
43 (rear panel’s backlight) button (A 57)
44 FUNC. (main functions) button (A 66)
45 START/STOP button (A 51)
46 Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)
47 CANCEL button (A 29)
48 MENU button (A 29)
49 CF card slot covers for CF card slots A (top) and
B(bottom)
50 CF card slots A (top) and B (bottom) (A 43)
51 RELEASE (battery release) latch (A 24)
52 Battery compartment
53 Viewfinder (A 36, 38)
54 Dioptric adjustment dial (A 36)
55 Rear panel (A 57)
56 MON./3G-SDI terminal cover (A 41)
57 CF card slot cover switches for CF card slots
A (top) and B (bottom) (A 43)
58 RESET button (A 187)
59 SLOT SELECT (CF card slot selection) button
(A 46, 128)
60 CF card release buttons for CF card slots A (top)
and B (bottom) (A 44)
61 BATT. OPEN (open battery compartment) switch
(A 24)
62 Battery compartment cover (A 24)
63 CF2 (CF card slot A) and CF3 (CF card slot B)
access indicators (A 44)
Names of Parts
18
65
66
67
67
68
64
64 Tape measure hooks
Use the hooks to accurately measure the distance
from the focal plane.
65 Focal plane marks
66 Socket for the WFT Attachment Bracket (A 50)
67 Strap mounts (A 39)
68 Accessory shoe with mounting hole for
0.64 cm (1/4 in.) screws
For attaching accessories such as the optional
VL-10Li II Battery Video Light.
71
72
70
69
69 TB-1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0.95 cm (3/8 in.)
screws (A 38)
70 Tripod socket (A 38)
71 Attachment sockets for the optional TA-100 Tripod
Adapter (A 38)
72 Tripod base screws (A 38)
19
Names of Parts
Monitor Unit
Handle Unit
2
1
3
4
5
6
Operation panel
(
A
20)
1LCD panel
2 MIRROR button (A 37)
3 Microphone lock screw (A 92)
4 Microphone holder (A 92)
5 Microphone cable clamp (A 92)
6 XLR terminals CH1 (right) and CH2 (left) (A 92)
31
2
4
1 Mounting hole for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) screws
2 Front accessory shoe
3 Top accessory shoe
4Lock screw (A 39)
Names of Parts
20
Operation panel
13
14
18171615
6
5
4
3
2
1
7891011 12
1 DISP. (display) button (A 55, 129)
2 Ñ (stop) button (A 128)/
Assignable button 14 (A 111)
3 WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 100)/
Assignable button 8 (A 111)
4 Ú (skip backward) button (A 130)/
Assignable button 13 (A 111)
5 EDGE MON. (edge monitor) button (A 100)/
Assignable button 9 (A 111)
6 INDEX button (A 128)
7 Ø (fast reverse playback) button (A 130)/
Assignable button 10 (A 111)
8 Ò (play/pause) button (A 128)/
Assignable button 11 (A 111)
9 × (fast playback) button (A 130)/
Assignable button 12 (A 111)
10 Ù (skip forward) button (A 130)/
Assignable button 15 (A 111)
11 XLR terminal switches for CH1 (top) and CH2
(bottom) (A 93)
12 Protective cover for XLR audio controls (A 94)
13 ã switches for CH1 (top) and CH2
(bottom) (A 94)
14 ã dials for CH1 (top) and CH2 (bottom)
(A 94)
15 START/STOP button (A 51)
16 MENU button (A 29)
17 Joystick (A 29)/SET button (A 29)
18 CANCEL button (A 29)
21
4K Workflow Overview
4K Workflow Overview
The following illustrates the typical 4K workflow for this camera.
Shoot in 4K mode (A 60) and record 4K RAW data using an external recorder connected to the
camera’s 3G-SDI terminals (A 41).
Insert a CF card into the camera to record an MXF clip simultaneously with the 4K RAW data
(A 63).
Develop the RAW data using the Cinema RAW Development software (A 152) to generate full-
quality data.
• You can also generate proxy data with the software.
Transfer the MXF file or proxy data generated by the software to your NLE system and edit offline
(A 154).
Perform color grading based on the full-quality data and the edit decision list (EDL) created from
offline editing.
Operating modes:
Recording Post-production
External 4K
recorder
Full-quality
data
3G-SDI
connection
RAW data
CF card
Proxy data
EDL
NLE
Associated
plugin
RAW recording
Cinema
RAW
Development
Color
grading
HD recording
MXF data
4K Workflow Overview
22
Color Grading with the ACES Workflow
ACESproxy10: ACESproxy10 video data that is output from the MON. 2 terminal when performing on-set color
grading. Use the [ 4K/2K/MXF] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [ACESPX10] setting to enable
ACESproxy10 output.
ASC-CDL: Refers to the list that contains color grading adjustment data. This step requires equipment
compatible with ASC-CDL.
IDT: Input Device Transform. Refers to the table used for converting color information of the input
device to ACES color space.
ODT: Output Device Transform. Refers to the table used for converting ACES color space information
to the color information of the ideal display device.
RRT: Reference Rendering Transform. Refers to the table used for converting data from ACES color
space to the color information of the ideal display device.
3G-SDI
output
External 4K
recorder
Cinema RAW
Development
Color grading
Post-production
On-set Color Grading
ACES
proxy10
Inverse
log
ASC-
CDL
RRT
RRT ODT
MON. 2 output
RAW
data
Open EXR
(ACES)
IDT
ASC-
CDL
RAW recording
ODT
2
23
Preparations
Preparing the Power Supply
You can power the camera using a battery pack or directly using the compact power adapter. If you connect the
compact power adapter to the camera while a battery pack is attached, the camera will draw power from the
power outlet.
Charge battery packs before use. For approximate charging times and recording/playback times with a fully
charged battery pack, refer to
Charging Times
(A 200) and
Recording and Playback Times
(A 200).
Using a Battery Pack
You can power the camera using the supplied BP-955 or an optional BP-950G, BP-970G or BP-975 Battery
Pack*. The BP-955 and BP-975 are compatible with Intelligent System, meaning that you can check the
remaining battery time.
* The optional BP-970G / BP-975 Battery Pack was not originally designed for use with this camera. Because of its size, you will
not be able to close the battery compartment cover when using one (A 194).
Charging the Battery Pack
Charge battery packs using the supplied CG-940 Battery Charger. Before
charging, remove the terminal cover of the battery pack.
1 Connect the power cord to the battery charger.
2 Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
3 Attach the battery pack to the battery charger.
• Press lightly and slide the battery pack in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
• The CHARGE indicator starts flashing and also indicates the battery pack’s
approximate charge. The indicator will stay on when charging has completed.
0-34%: Flashes once per second
35-69%: Flashes twice per second
70-99%: Flashes 3 times per second
4 When charging has completed, remove the battery pack from the battery charger.
5 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect it from the battery charger.
IMPORTANT
• Do not connect to the battery charger any product that is not expressly recommended for use with this camera.
NOTES
• We recommend charging the battery pack in temperatures between 10 ºC and 30 ºC (50 ºF and 86 ºF).
Outside the temperature range of 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF), charging will not start.
• If there is a malfunction with the battery charger or battery pack, the CHARGE indicator will go out and
charging will stop.
• For handling precautions regarding the battery pack, refer to
Battery Pack
(A 193).
• Charged battery packs continue to discharge naturally. Therefore, charge them on the day of use, or the day
before, to ensure a full charge.
• We recommend that you prepare battery packs to last 2 to 3 times longer than you think you might need.
햲
햴
햳
CHARGE indicator
Preparing the Power Supply
24
Attaching the Battery Pack
1Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Slide the BATT. OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open
the battery compartment cover.
3 Insert the battery pack all the way into the compartment as shown
in the illustration and press it gently toward the left until it clicks.
4 Close the battery compartment cover.
Removing the Battery Pack
1Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Slide the BATT. OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open
the battery compartment cover.
3 Holding down the RELEASE latch, slide the battery pack toward the
right and then pull it out.
4 Close the battery compartment cover.
Checking the Remaining Battery Charge
When the camera is turned on, you can check the remaining battery
charge by looking at any recording/playback screen or the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 183). When
the camera is turned off, use one of the following methods to check the approximate remaining battery charge.
For batteries compatible with Intelligent System, press the CHECK
button. An indicator will light for approximately 3 seconds and show the
approximate remaining battery charge.
0-25%
26-50%
51-75%
76-100%
CHECK button
Battery charge indicator
25
Preparing the Power Supply
Press the BATT. INFO button to display the remaining battery charge (for 5
seconds). Depending on the battery life, the battery information may not be
displayed.
NOTES
• The first time you use a battery pack, fully charge it and then use the
camera until the battery pack is completely exhausted. Doing so will ensure that the remaining recording time
will be displayed accurately.
• Repeatedly charging and discharging the battery pack will eventually shorten its battery life. You can check the
battery life on the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 183) or the battery information screen (press the
BATT. INFO button while the camera is turned off). Fully charging the battery pack and then discharging it will
give you a more accurate reading.
• USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery.
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can also power the camera directly from a power outlet
using the supplied CA-940N Compact Power Adapter.
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Connect the compact power adapter’s DC plug to the DC
IN terminal on the camera.
3 Connect the power cord to the compact power adapter
and plug it into a power outlet.
IMPORTANT
• Turn off the camera before connecting or disconnecting the
compact power adapter.
NOTES
• When using the camera with a household power outlet, you
can change the battery pack while the power is on.
DC IN
terminal
Preparing the Power Supply
26
Turning the Camera On and Off
The camera has two operating modes: CAMERA ( ) mode for making recordings and MEDIA ( )
mode for playing back recordings. Select the operating mode using the Q switch.
To turn on the camera
Set the Q switch to CAMERA for mode or MEDIA for
mode.
• If a message appears prompting you to open the MON./3G-SDI
terminal cover, open the cover to shoot in 4K or 2K mode.
To turn off the camera
Set the Q switch to OFF.
CAMERA mode MEDIA mode: Allows you to play
back recordings made on a CF card.
27
Date, Time and Language Settings
Date, Time and Language Settings
Setting the Date and Time
You will need to set the date and time of the camera before you can start using it. When the camera’s clock is
not set, the [Date/Time] screen will appear automatically with the first field selected (month or day, depending on
the country/region of purchase).
1 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the month/day then move (Ð) to the
next field.
• To move to the next field you can also press SET (press the joystick itself or press the SET button).
2 Change the rest of the fields in the same way.
3 Select (Ð) [Set] and then press SET to start the clock and close the screen.
NOTES
• You can change the date format and the clock format (12/24 hours) with the [w Other Functions] > [Set
Clock] > [Date Format] setting.
• You can also change the date and time later on (not during the initial setup) with the [w Other Functions] >
[Set Clock] > [Date/Time] setting.
• When the built-in rechargeable lithium battery is exhausted, the date and time setting may be lost. In such
case, recharge the built-in lithium battery (A 195) and set the time zone, date and time again.
Changing the Time Zone
Change the time zone to match the time zone of your location. The default
setting is [UTC-05:00 New York] or [UTC+01:00 Central Europe],
depending on the country/region of purchase.The time zones are based
on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select
[
w Other Functions].
3 Select [Time Zone] in a similar fashion.
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the time zone.
5 Press SET to set the time zone and then press the MENU button to close the menu.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[w Other Functions]
[Time Zone]
[UTC-05:00 New York]
or
[UTC+01:00 Central Europe]*
Date, Time and Language Settings
28
Displaying the Date and Time while Recording
You can display the date and time on the screen.
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select
[£ LCD/VF Setup].
3 Select [Custom Display 2] and then [Date/Time] in a similar fashion.
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the information to display.
• Select [Off] to record without displaying the date and time.
5 Press SET and then press the MENU button to close the menu.
• The selected date/time display will appear at the bottom of the screen.
Changing the Language
The default language of the camera is English. You can change it to
German, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Russian, Simplified Chinese,
Korean or Japanese. Please note that some settings and screens will be
displayed in English, regardless of the language setting.
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select [w Other Functions].
3 Select [Language !] in a similar fashion.
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select a language.
5 Press SET to change the language and then press the MENU button to close the menu.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[Custom Display 2]
[Date/Time]
[Off]
[w Other Functions]
[Language !]
[English]
29
Using the Menus
Using the Menus
In mode, many of the camera’s functions can be adjusted from the menu for general settings, which
opens after pressing the MENU button. You can also register frequently used menu settings in a customized
submenu (My Menu) for easy access. In mode, press the MENU button to open the menu for general
settings or SET to open the clip menu for clip operations. For details about the available menu options and
settings, refer to
Menu Options
(A 167).
Selecting an Option from the Menu
The following is a step-by-step explanation of how to select an option from the menu. In the procedures
throughout the rest of this manual, opening and closing the menu is assumed and not included in the procedure.
1 Press the MENU button.
• The menu opens with the orange selection frame indicating the menu item that was selected the previous
time the menu was closed (unless the camera was turned off).
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired submenu.
3 Push the joystick right or press SET.
• The orange selection frame will appear on a menu item in the submenu.
• Press the CANCEL button, push the joystick left, or select [L] to return to the previous submenu.
4 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired menu item.
• If a submenu contains many menu items, a scroll bar will appear on the right side of the submenu indicating
that you must scroll up or down to see other menu items.
•A
Ð mark next to a menu item indicates another submenu. Repeat steps 3 and 4.
Operating modes:
MENU button
Press to open the menu and then press again to close the menu after
adjusting desired settings.
CANCEL button
Press to return to the previous menu or to stop some operations that are
in progress.
SET button
Note that while only the joystick on the monitor unit is labeled as “SET”,
each joystick will function as the SET button when pressed down.
SELECT dial
Turn the dial to move the orange selection frame up or down in the menu.
Joystick
Push the joystick to move the
orange selection frame in the
menu. Then, press the joystick
itself or the SET button at the
center of the SELECT dial to select
the menu item indicated by the
orange selection frame.
CANCEL
button
MENU button
SET button
Joystick
SELECT dial
MENU button
CANCEL button
Using the Menus
30
5 Push the joystick right or press SET.
• The orange selection frame will appear on a setting option.
• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous submenu.
6 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired setting option and then
press SET.
• Depending on the menu item, additional selections may be necessary.
7 Press the MENU button to close the menu.
NOTES
• Unavailable items may appear grayed out.
• Pressing the MENU button at any time closes the menu.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can use the remote
controller’s up/down/left/right/SET buttons in the same way as the camera’s joystick.
• You can check some of the current settings on the status screens (A 178).
Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu)
You can register up to 14 frequently used menu settings under the My Menu submenu for easy access.
Furthermore, if you set an assignable button to [My Menu] (A 111), you can press the button to access your
registered menu settings even faster and more easily.
Adding Menu Settings
1 Open the My Menu [Register] screen.
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Register]
• The menu will change to blue to indicate you are selecting menu
settings to add to the My Menu submenu.
• Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation and return to the
regular menu.
2 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to add and then press SET.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.
• The menu setting you registered will now appear under the My Menu submenu.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
Rearranging Menu Settings
1 Open the My Menu [Move] screen.
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Move]
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting
you want to move and then press SET.
•An orange ] icon will appear next to the setting you selected to
move.
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to move the setting to the desired position and then press
SET.
Operating modes:
[¥ My Menu]
[Edit]
[Register]
[¥My Menu]
[Edit]
[Move]
31
Using the Menus
Removing Menu Settings
1 Open the My Menu [Delete] screen.
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Delete]
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the setting
you want to remove and then press SET.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.
Resetting the My Menu Submenu
1 Reset all the menu settings registered to the My Menu submenu.
[¥ My Menu] > [Edit] > [Reset All]
2 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.
[¥ My Menu]
[Edit]
[Delete]
[¥ My Menu]
[Edit]
[Reset All]
Preparing the Camera
32
Preparing the Camera
This section outlines the basic preparations for the camera such as attaching a lens and attaching the modular
units to the camera: monitor unit, handle unit, eye cup, etc. This section also covers how to adjust the viewfinder
and LCD screen. Your camera is nothing if not versatile and you can choose the configuration that best fits your
needs and shooting conditions.
NOTES
• When changing the camera’s configuration, be careful
not to obstruct in any way the cooling fan’s air vents.
Preparing the Lens
As much as possible, attach and remove the lens quickly and in a clean environment free of dust. Refer also to
the instruction manual of the lens used.
IMPORTANT
• When attaching/removing a lens, avoid direct sunlight or strong light sources. Also, be careful not to drop the
camera or lens.
NOTES
• Be careful not to touch the lens mount or any components inside the lens mount area.
• Replace the body cap to the lens mount immediately after removing the lens from the camera.
• Keep the body cap clean and free from dust or dirt particles.
Minimal configuration Configuration with monitor Configuration with monitor
and handle for easy carrying
Exhaust vent Intake ventIntake vent
33
Preparing the Camera
2 Attaching an EF Lens
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Turn the mount handle clockwise until it stops.
3 Remove the body cap from the camera and any dust caps from the
lens.
4 Align the lens and mount making sure that the index marks are
aligned.
• EF lenses: Align the red mark on the lens with the red EF Lens
mount index mark on the camera.
• EF-S lenses: Align the white mark on the lens with the white EF-S
Lens mount index mark on the camera.
5 After the lens is attached to the camera, without turning the lens,
turn the mount handle counter-clockwise until it is tightened firmly.
NOTES
• Turning on the image stabilization function of an EF lens may
reduce the effective usage time of the battery pack. When image
stabilization is not necessary, for example if the camera is fixed to a
tripod, it is recommended to turn it off.
• Depending on the lens used, you may experience one or more of the following limitations.
- The lens model name may be shortened when displayed on the screen.
- You may not be able to focus manually when the focus mode switch is set to AF.
- You may not be able to use the focus preset function on super telephoto lenses.
• You cannot use the power zoom function on lenses with that function.
• When using a compatible lens, you can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Retract Lens]
setting (A 123) to retract the lens automatically when the camera’s power is turned off.
2 Removing an EF Lens
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 While holding the bottom of the lens, turn the mount handle
clockwise until it stops.
• Make sure not to drop the lens when removing it.
3 Replace the body cap to the camera and the dust cap to the lens.
Index mark
Preparing the Camera
34
2 Peripheral Illumination Correction
Depending on the characteristics of the lens used, the image around the corners of the picture may seem darker
due to light fall-off or peripheral illumination drop. If the camera has correction data available for the EF lens used,
it can apply this correction data to compensate as necessary.
1 Attach the lens you want to use.
2 Open the peripheral illumination correction screen.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Periph. Illum. Corr.]
• If correction data is available, the lens model name will appear on the
screen.
• If correction data is not available, [Periph. Illum. Corr.] will appear
grayed out. Visit your local Canon Web site and check if there is
correction data available for the lens you are using. If so, download the necessary update package and
upgrade the camera’s firmware following the instructions supplied therein.
3 Select [On] and then press SET.
•As long as [~ Camera Setup] > [Periph. Illum. Corr.] is set to [On], the camera will automatically apply the
appropriate correction data.
NOTES
• About lens correction data:
- The camera contains a register of correction data for compatible lenses that were available at the time the
camera went on sale. Correction data for future lenses will be made available as part of the regular updates
released for the camera’s firmware. For more details, visit your local Canon Web site.
- Depending on the recording conditions, noise may appear in the periphery of the image as a result of the
correction.
- The level of correction will be lower for lenses that cannot provide distance information.
- The level of correction will be lower the higher the ISO speed/gain setting used.
- No correction will be applied when correction data is not available for the lens attached.
- When using EF-S lenses, peripheral illumination fall-off may be more pronounced.
Operating modes:
Changing a Lens While Maintaining the Time Code’s Progress
You can change the lens while the camera is turned on and the time
code is running.
1 Press and hold the LENS EXCHANGE button for 1 second.
• The camera enters lens exchange mode and the tally lamp will
flash twice every 2 seconds. During this time, the time code will
continue running.
• While the camera is in lens exchange mode, only the Q
switch and LENS EXCHANGE button can be operated. Also, the LCD screen will turn off and output from
the video terminals will be put on hold.
2 Remove the lens attached to the camera and attach the new lens.
• Do not set the Q switch to OFF.
3 Press the LENS EXCHANGE button again.
• The camera exits lens exchange mode.
• Opening the CF card slot cover or removing the SD card will also exit lens exchange mode.
Operating modes:
[~ Camera Setup]
[Periph. Illum. Corr.]
[Off]
35
Preparing the Camera
- When using non-Canon lenses, peripheral illumination will not be corrected. Even if the [~ Camera Setup]
> [Periph. Illum. Corr.] setting is available (not grayed out), it is recommended to set it to [Off].
3 Attaching a PL Lens
1 Hold a bayonet ring handle and turn the bayonet ring counter-
clockwise to remove the body cap and remove any dust caps from
the lens.
2 Attach the lens to the camera aligning a groove on the lens with the
PL lens index pin on the mount.
3 Turn the bayonet ring clockwise to fix the lens in place.
3 Removing a PL Lens
1 Turn the bayonet ring handles counter-clockwise.
2 Remove the lens and replace the body cap to the camera and the
dust cap to the lens.
Attaching and Removing the Monitor Unit
You can attach the monitor unit to the accessory shoe on the camera or that on the handle unit. Further ahead
you will find details about using the LCD panel and adjusting the LCD screen (A 37).
Attaching the Monitor Unit
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Insert the attachment base of the monitor unit to the camera’s or
the handle unit’s accessory shoe.
• Use the attachment base at the bottom of the monitor unit to
attach it directly to the camera. Use the attachment base at the
back of the monitor unit to attach it to the accessory shoe on the
front of the handle unit.
3 Tighten the monitor unit’s lock screw.
4 Connect the monitor unit’s cables to the camera.
• Align the Î marks on the cables and terminals. Then, connect
cable number 1 (with the white line) to the camera’s EXT 1
terminal and cable number 2 to the EXT 2 terminal.
Removing the Monitor Unit
1 Set the Q switch to OFF.
2 Disconnect the monitor unit’s cables from the camera’s EXT 1 and EXT 2 terminals.
• Pull back the metallic tips of the cable to release the cable and then disconnect the cable.
3 Unscrew the lock screw and then gently slide out the monitor unit from the accessory shoe.
PL lens index pin
Preparing the Camera
36
Using the Viewfinder
Adjusting the Viewfinder’s Position
1 Gently pull out the viewfinder until it stops.
2 Adjust the viewfinder’s angle as necessary.
• The viewfinder unit can be adjusted up to 60º vertically.
Attaching and Detaching the Eye Cup
Attach the eye cup so that it covers the rubber portion of the
viewfinder unit.
• The dioptric adjustment dial can be operated even with the eye cup
attached.
• For left eye use, attach the eye cup so that the protruding portion
faces the opposite side.
Detach the eye cup as shown in the illustration.
Dioptric Adjustment
Turn on the camera and adjust the dioptric adjustment dial.
Eye cup
Viewfinder
unit
Dioptric
adjustment
dial
37
Preparing the Camera
Attaching the Viewfinder Cap
Pointing the viewfinder lens at the sun or other strong light sources
may cause damage to internal components. When you are not using
the viewfinder, make sure to attach the viewfinder cap to the
viewfinder. This will also protect the viewfinder from scratches and
dirt. Attach the viewfinder cap by inserting it into the rubber portion of
the viewfinder unit.
Using the LCD Panel
The whole monitor unit can be rotated 270º sideways allowing for
easy monitoring and operation from the side of the camera.
Additionally, the independently articulated LCD panel can be rotated
180º sideways and 270º up and down. In combination, you can
position the LCD panel at a comfortable angle whatever the shooting
style you need.
1 Rotate the monitor unit sideways to the desired angle.
2 Open the LCD panel and adjust the screen to the desired
position.
Adjusting the LCD Panel for Shoulder Mounted Use
1 Open the LCD panel 90º until it is perpendicular to the monitor unit.
2 Rotate the LCD panel 180º left.
3 Rotate the LCD panel 180º forward.
4 Press the MIRROR button until the image is displayed in the correct
orientation.
• Repeatedly pressing the MIRROR button will change the
displayed image in the following order: Image inverted
horizontally ´ Image inverted horizontally and vertically ´ Image
inverted vertically ´ Original image.
NOTES
• About the LCD and viewfinder screens: The screens are produced using extremely high-precision manufacturing
techniques, with more than 99.99% of the pixels operating to specification. Less than 0.01% of the pixels may
occasionally misfire or appear as black, red, blue or green dots. This has no effect on the recorded image and
does not constitute a malfunction.
• You can set the LCD screen to black & white (A 38).
• When you use a commercially available lens adapter and the image on the screen is inverted, you can use the
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Scan Reverse Rec] setting to return the image to the correct
orientation. You can record this corrected image or have the camera output it from the 3G-SDI terminal, MON.
terminal, HD/SD SD terminalI or HDMI OUT terminal.
• If you are not interested in using the viewfinder while the monitor unit is attached, you can set [£ LCD/VF
Setup] > [LCD/VF Simul.] to [Off] to conserve the camera’s power. Even when [LCD/VF Simul.] is set to [Off],
closing the LCD panel will automatically activate the viewfinder.
• While recording with the LCD panel rotated in a different direction or angle (for example, facing toward the
subject), you can press the MIRROR button repeatedly to invert the image on the screen horizontally, vertically
or both ways.
You can use the viewfinder and watch
the LCD screen at the same time
Preparing the Camera
38
Adjusting the Viewfinder/LCD Screen
You can adjust the brightness, contrast, color, sharpness, and backlight
of the viewfinder and LCD screen independently of each other. These
adjustments will not affect your recordings.
1 Open the setup menu for the viewfinder or LCD screen.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [LCD Setup] or [VF Setup]
2 Select [Brightness], [Contrast], [Color], [Sharpness] or [Backlight] and
then press SET.
3 Adjust the setting and then press SET.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other settings as necessary.
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [LCD Setup] or [VF Setup] (A 111), you can press the button to open the
respective submenu.
Setting the Screen to Black & White
The viewfinder and LCD screen display in color by default but you can set
them to black & white. Even when the screen is black & white, onscreen
text and icons will still be displayed in color.
1 Open the [LCD/VF B&W] submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [LCD/VF B&W]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [LCD/VF B&W] (A 111), you can press the button to turn the black & white
display on and off.
Using a Tripod
The camera is shipped with the TB-1 Tripod Base for tripods with 0.95 cm (3/8 in.)
screws. You can mount the camera on a tripod but do not use tripods with mounting
screws longer than 5.5 mm (0.2 in.) as this may cause damage to the camera.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[LCD Setup]
[VF Setup]
[Brightness: ±0]
[Contrast: ±0]
[Color: ±0]
[Sharpness: 2]
[Backlight: Normal]
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[LCD/VF B&W]
[Off]
5.5 mm
39
Preparing the Camera
Using a Tripod with 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) Mounting Screws
To use a tripod with 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) mounting screws, first attach
the supplied tripod adapter base to the camera and then attach
the tripod to the adapter base.
1 Remove the original TB-1 tripod base from the camera.
• Remove the 4 screws and then remove the base.
2 Attach the supplied tripod adapter base for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)
tripods.
• Firmly screw in the 4 screws.
3 Attach the tripod.
• Firmly screw in the tripod screw.
Attaching the Handle Unit
1 Insert the attachment base at the bottom of the handle unit to the
camera’s accessory shoe.
2 Tighten the handle unit’s lock screw while gently pressing it down.
NOTES
• You can use the accessory shoe or the socket for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.)
screws on the handle unit to attach a variety of commercially
available accessories.
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Pass the ends through the strap mount and adjust the length of
the strap.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to drop the camera when attaching or adjusting the
shoulder strap.
Preparing the Camera
40
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers
You can remove the plastic covers of the following terminals and SD card slot to access them more readily. For
information on removing the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover, refer to
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible
External Recorder
(A 41).
Removing the Terminal Covers
Open the terminal cover and gently pull it straight out.
Attaching the Terminal Covers
Insert the connecting strip into the opening to attach the terminal cover.
NOTES
• If the connecting strip is difficult to grasp, use a pair of tweezers or similar
tool.
• EXT 1 and EXT 2
•SYNC OUT
• GENLOCK and TIME CODE
• HD/SD SDI
• CH1 and CH2
(XLR terminals on the monitor unit)
• × (headphones)
•DC IN
•SD card slot
• REMOTE and HDMI OUT
•MIC
•WFT terminal
•GRIP terminal
41
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible External Recorder
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible External Recorder
When you use this camera to make 4K or 2K recordings, you must connect the camera to an external recorder*
using the 3G-SDI terminals. In addition to a video signal, the 3G-SDI terminals output an audio signal, time code
signal, metadata and clip name information. Output from the 3G-SDI terminal is enabled by default but if it has
been disabled, you must enable it after you connect the camera to the external recorder.
Refer also to the external recorder’s instruction manual for details on how to record.
* To make 4K recordings, the external recorder must be compatible with Canon RAW files. Refer to Canon’s Web site for the latest
information on compatible recorders.
1 Unscrew the screw on the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover and pull
the cover out.
2 Connect two commercially available BNC cables to the camera’s
3G-SDI terminals and the external recorder.
• Refer to the external recorder’s instruction manual for details.
3 Open the [3G-SDI Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [3G-SDI Output]
4 Select [On] and then press SET.
IMPORTANT
• After you connect the camera to the external recorder, make a test recording first to check if they are operating
correctly.
NOTES
• You can also remove the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover by sliding the screw toward the back of the camera and
then pulling it outward along with the cover.
• If you do not intend to use the 3G-SDI terminals in other situations, set the camera to MXF mode (A 64 ) and
then close the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover in order to conserve the camera’s power. When you do so, the
camera can record only in MXF mode.
• You can use the [~ Camera Setup] > [Color Space] setting to configure the color space of the video output
from the 3G-SDI terminal and MON. terminals to DCI-P3+, Cinema Gamut or BT. 2020. When checking the
output, you will need a display device that is compatible with each color space.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[3G-SDI Output]
[On]
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible External Recorder
42
Video signal output from the 3G-SDI terminals
The following summarizes the video signal output from the 3G-SDI terminals for general shooting situations. The
figures in parentheses apply to 2K mode.
1
Both 3G-SDI 1 terminal and 3G-SDI 2 terminal are required. The output from each terminal differs by one frame.
2
The signals output from 3G-SDI 1 terminal and 3G-SDI 2 terminal are the same.
The following summarizes the video signal output from the 3G-SDI terminals for slow & fast motion mode.
1
When the shooting frame rate is enclosed by brackets on the screen, this indicates that both 3G-SDI terminals are necessary to
record the 3G-SDI output signal using an external recorder.
2
The signals output from 3G-SDI 1 terminal and 3G-SDI 2 terminal are the same.
3
Both 3G-SDI terminals combine to output this signal.
NOTES
• Depending on the external recorder, you may not be able to record at the desired video configuration.
Video configuration (A 60) Output signal
System priority /
Recording mode
Frame rate
3G-SDI 1
terminal
3G-SDI 2
terminal
4K / RAW
2K / 12-bit
2K / 10-bit
59.94P 29.97P
1
29.97P
1
29.97P 29.97P
2
29.97P
2
23.98P 23.98P
2
23.98P
2
50.00P 25.00P
1
25.00P
1
25.00P 25.00P
2
25.00P
2
24.00P 24.00P
2
24.00P
2
4K / HRAW
4K / 4K1K RAW
2K / 10-bit
59.94P 29.97PsF
2
(59.94P
2
) 29.97PsF
2
(59.94P
2
)
50.00P 25.00PsF
2
(50.00P
2
) 25.00PsF
2
(50.00P
2
)
Video configuration Output signal
System priority /
Recording mode
System
frequency
Frame rate
(slow & fast motion)
3G-SDI 1
terminal
3G-SDI 2
terminal
4K / RAW
2K / 12-bit
2K / 10-bit
59.94 Hz
24.00 Hz
1 to 30 1 to 30P
2
1 to 30P
2
32 to 60
1
32 to 60P
3
50.00 Hz
1 to 25 1 to 25P
2
1 to 25P
2
26 to 50
1
26 to 50P
3
4K / HRAW
4K / 4K1K RAW
2K / 10-bit
59.94 Hz
24.00 Hz
1 to 60 1 to 60P
2
1 to 60P
2
62 to 120
1
62 to 120P
3
50.00 Hz
1 to 50 1 to 50P
2
1 to 50P
2
52 to 100
1
52 to 100P
3
43
Preparing Recording Media
Preparing Recording Media
The camera records MXF clips to 1 CompactFlash (CF) cards and photos* to . SD and / SDHC memory
cards. The camera is equipped with two CF card slots. Initialize recording media (A 45) when you use them
with this camera for the first time.
* The camera can record custom picture files and a camera settings file onto the SD card as well. The SD card serves also to store
user memo files created with the Canon XF Utility software (A 154) that you can then read and embed in the clips’ metadata.
Compatible CF cards
You can use UDMA-compatible* Type I CF cards with a capacity of at least 512 MB with the camera. For more
details on cards that can be used, visit your local Canon Web site.
* The Ultra Direct Memory Access (UDMA) specification allows data to be transferred between the CF card and device at high
transfer speeds (measured in MB/s). Depending on the CF card, you may not be able to record even when using a UDMA-
compatible CF card.
IMPORTANT
• About high capacity CF cards You can use CF cards with a capacity of 128 GB or larger with this
camcorder but such CF cards are initialized using the exFAT file system.
- When using exFAT-formatted CF cards with other devices (digital recorders, card readers, etc.), make sure
that the external device is compatible with exFAT. For more information on compatibility, contact the
computer, operating system or memory card manufacturer.
- If you use exFAT-formatted CF cards with a computer OS that is not exFAT-compatible, you may be
prompted to format the CF card. In such case, cancel the operation to prevent data loss.
NOTES
• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed for all CF cards.
Inserting a CF Card
You can insert a CF card into CF card slot A or slot B. If you have two
CF cards, you can use both slots.
1 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the direction of the
arrow.
• The CF card slot cover will open upward (slot A) or downward
(slot B).
2 Insert the CF card straight, with the label facing up, all the
way into the slot.
3 Close the CF card slot cover.
• Do not force the cover closed if the CF card is not correctly
inserted.
Preparing Recording Media
44
Checking the Status of the CF Card Slots
You can check the status of the CF card slots immediately by looking
at the CF2/CF3 access indicator. Refer to the following table.
Removing a CF card
1 Wait until the access indicator for the card slot with the CF
card to be removed is off.
2 Slide the CF card slot cover switch in the direction of the arrow.
• The CF card slot cover will open upward (slot A) or downward
(slot B).
3 Push the CF card release button.
• The release button partially pops out.
4 Push in the CF card release button to release the CF card.
5 Pull the CF card all the way out and close the CF card slot
cover.
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access
indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in
permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed.
NOTES
• If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] function to [Off], the access indicators will not
illuminate.
Inserting and Removing an SD Card
1 Turn off the camera.
2 Open the SD card slot cover.
3 Insert the SD card all the way into the SD card slot until it clicks.
• The SD card slot is positioned at an angle. Align the SD card straight
in relation to the SD card slot, with the label facing the lens.
4 Close the SD card slot cover.
• Do not force the cover closed if the SD card is not correctly inserted.
Access indicator color CF card slot status
Red Accessing CF card.
Green
Recording/playback is possible and the CF card slot is
selected for recording/playback.
Indicator off
A CF card is not inserted, the CF card slot is not currently
selected, or the CF card is not being accessed.
,
,
SD card access
indicator
45
Preparing Recording Media
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in
permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not remove the SD card.
• Turn off the camera before inserting or removing an SD card. Inserting or removing the SD card with the
camera on may result in permanent data loss.
• SD cards have front and back sides that are not interchangeable. Inserting an SD card facing the wrong
direction can cause a malfunction of the camera. Be sure to insert the SD card as described in step 3.
NOTES
• To remove the SD card: Push the SD card once to release it. When the SD card springs out, pull it all the way
out.
• If you set the [w Other Functions] > [Media Access LED] function to [Off], the access indicators will not
illuminate.
Initializing the Recording Media
The first time you use any recording media with this camera, initialize it first. You can also initialize a recording
media to permanently delete all the data it contains.
When initializing an SD card, you can select quick initialization, which clears the file allocation table but does not
physically erase the stored data, or complete initialization, which deletes all data completely.
1 Open the [Initialize Media] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Initialize Media]
2 Select [CF A], [CF B] or [SD Card] and then press SET.
To initialize a CF card
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
• The CF card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased.
To initialize an SD card
3 Select [Complete] (complete initialization) or [Quick] (quick initialization) and then press SET.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• If you are using the [Complete] initialization option, press SET twice to cancel the operation while it is in
progress. You can use the SD card but all data will be erased.
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
• The SD card is initialized and all the data it contains is erased.
IMPORTANT
• Initializing a recording media will permanently erase all data, including clips with an $ mark, protected photos,
and custom picture files. Lost data cannot be recovered. Make sure you save important recordings in
advance.
• Depending on the SD card, the complete initialization may take up to a few minutes.
Operating modes:
[w Other Functions]
[Initialize Media]
Preparing Recording Media
46
NOTES
• While recording on a CF card, you can initialize another CF card in the other CF card slot.
• If you set an assignable button to [Initialize Media] (A 111), you can press the button to open the initialization
submenu.
Switching Between the CF Card Slots
The camera features two CF card slots, CF2 (CF card slot A) and CF3
(CF card slot B). If both slots contain a CF card, you can switch between
them as necessary.
Press the SLOT SELECT button.
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in green. On the screen, the CF card selected
is indicated with a Ð mark next to the CF card icon and in the rear panel, with a Î mark on top of the CF
card icon.
NOTES
• If both CF card slots contain a CF card and you open the cover of the selected
slot, the camera will automatically switch to the other slot.
• You cannot use the SLOT SELECT button to switch between CF card slots
while recording.
• When using an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter, you can also switch
between CF card slots remotely by pressing [SLOT SELECT] on the Wi-Fi
Remote screen.
Selecting the CF Card Recording Method
The camera features two useful CF card recording methods, relay recording and double slot recording.
Relay recording: This function allows you to continue recording on another CF card without interruption if the CF
card you are using becomes full. Relay recording is available from CF card slot A to CF card slot B, and vice
versa.
Double slot recording: This function records the same clip simultaneously to both CF cards, which is a
convenient way to make a backup copy of your recording while you record.
To use relay recording
By default, this function is activated. If it has been deactivated, follow the
procedure below to activate it.
1 Open the [Relay Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Set CF Card Slot] > [Relay Rec]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Set CF Card Slot]
[Relay Rec]
[On]
47
Preparing Recording Media
To use double slot recording
1 Open the [Double Slot Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Set CF Card Slot] > [Double Slot Rec]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
NOTES
• When the bit rate is set to 50 Mbps (A 60), relay recording is not
available during slow motion recording.
• If a CF card becomes full during double slot recording, recording on both cards will stop. On the other hand, if
an error occurs with one of the cards, recording will continue on the other card.
• Double slot recording cannot be used with relay recording or slow & fast motion recording.
Checking the Available Recording Time for CF Cards
When the camera is in mode, the display on the upper left of the screen indicates which CF card slot is in
use and the available recording time (in minutes*) that remains on each CF card. The same information is
displayed in the rear panel. When the camera is in mode, the available recording time is displayed only in
the rear panel.
On the [Media] status screen (A 181), you can check the total space and used space of each recording media,
as well as the available recording time* on each CF card and the available number of photos on the SD card.
* The approximate available recording time is based on the current bit rate (A 60).
Recovering Data on the CF Card
Some actions, such as suddenly turning off the camera or removing the CF card while data is being recorded,
can cause data errors on the CF card. In such case, you may be able to recover the data on the CF card.
1 Insert the CF card with the data to be recovered into the camera.
2 When the screen prompts you to recover the data, select [OK] and then press SET.
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
NOTES
• This procedure will delete clips shorter than 10 seconds in length. Additionally, up to 10 seconds will be
deleted from the end of clips on the CF card.
• In some cases, data may not be recovered, such as when the FAT32 file system is corrupted or the CF card is
physically damaged.
• While recording on a CF card, you can recover data from another CF card by inserting it into the other CF card
slot.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Set CF Card Slot]
[Double Slot Rec]
[Off]
Adjusting the Black Balance
48
Adjusting the Black Balance
You can have the camera adjust the black balance automatically when ambient temperature changes
considerably or if there is a noticeable change in a true black video signal.
1 Open the [ABB] screen.
[~ Camera Setup] > [ABB]
2 Attach the body cap to the lens mount.
• If a lens was attached, remove the lens and replace the body cap.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The automatic black balance procedure will start.
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
• If the body cap is not correctly attached, [Error] will appear on the screen. Press SET and repeat the
procedure from the beginning.
NOTES
• Adjusting the black balance may be necessary in the following cases:
- When using the camera for the very first time or after a long period of not using it.
- After sudden or extreme changes in ambient temperature.
- After changing the ISO speed/gain settings.
• The automatic black balance procedure will take approximately 40 seconds when the frame rate is set to
23.98P or 24.00P.
• During the adjustment of the black balance, you may notice some irregular displays appear on the screen. This
is not a malfunction.
• Resetting the camera’s settings using the [w Other Functions] > [Reset] > [All Settings] or [Camera
Settings] menu option will reset also the black balance adjustment. In such case, perform the procedure again.
Operating modes:
[~ Camera Setup]
[ABB]
49
Operating the Camera Remotely
Operating the Camera Remotely
There are two methods in which the camera can be operated remotely. The first is to connect the optional
RC-V100 Remote Controller to the camera’s REMOTE terminal. The second is to attach the optional WFT-E6
Wireless File Transmitter to the camera’s WFT terminal to use the Wi-Fi Remote application.
Using the RC-V100 Remote Controller
You can connect the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller to control the camera (including the advanced
recording functions) from a distance. The remote controller lets you turn the camera on, navigate the menus and
remotely control the aperture (2) and shutter speed, change picture-related settings like the knee and
sharpness, and more.
Use the cable supplied with the remote controller to connect it to the camera. For details on how to connect and
use the remote controller, refer to its instruction manual.
1 Turn off the camera and connect the optional RC-V100 Remote
Controller to the camera.
2 Turn on the camera and open the [REMOTE Term.] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [REMOTE Term.]
3 Select [RC-V100] and then press SET.
Options
NOTES
• The camera’s ND filter cannot be changed using the ND button on the remote controller.
• The following controls on the remote controller will not operate the camera: AGC button, AUTO KNEE button,
AWB button, AF button and AUTO IRIS button.
• The ZOOM button on the remote controller will operate the lens only when a CINE-SERVO CN7x17 KAS S/E1
lens is attached to the camera.
• Depending on when you purchased the lens, to be able to control a CINE-SERVO CN7x17 KAS S/E1 lens
using Browser Remote you may need to update the lens’s firmware. For details, consult a Canon Service
Center.
• Adjusting picture-related settings with the remote controller can be performed only after a custom picture file is
selected (A 114).
Operating modes:
[RC-V100]: Select this option to use the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller.
[Standard]: Select this option to use commercially available remote controls.
Connection cable
(supplied with the RC-V100)
REMOTE A terminal
[w Other Functions]
[REMOTE Term.]
[Standard]
Operating the Camera Remotely
50
Remote Operation Via the Wi-Fi Remote Application
You can attach an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera and operate the
camera remotely via Wi-Fi Remote, a Web browser application that can be accessed using
the Web browser on any device compatible with Wi-Fi networks*. The Wi-Fi Remote
application lets you monitor the image through live view, start and stop recording and
remotely control the shutter speed, ISO speed/gain and other settings. You can also create,
edit and transfer a metadata profile, set various shot marks and check the recording media,
remaining recording time, time code, etc.
* For details about compatible devices, operating systems, Web browsers, etc. please visit your local Canon
Web site.
Preparing the System for Wi-Fi Remote
To be able to operate the camera remotely via the Wi-Fi Remote application you will need to attach an optional
WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter to the camera’s WFT terminal and complete the wireless network setup.
Download ‘WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for Canon Camcorders’ (PDF file) from your local Canon
Web site and follow the instructions to complete the necessary setup.
Operating modes:
3
51
Recording
Recording Video
This section explains the recording basics. Before you use an external recorder, make sure it is operating
correctly. Before you begin recording on a CF card, make a test recording first to check if the camera is operating
correctly. Record for approximately 6 minutes at 50 Mbps (A 60). Should the camera fail to operate correctly,
refer to
Troubleshooting
(A 185).
For details on recording audio, refer to
Recording Audio
(A 92).
Preparing to Record
1 Attach the monitor unit, handle unit, etc. as necessary to build the
desired configuration (
A 32).
2 Attach a charged battery pack to the camera (
A 24).
3 For MXF recordings, insert a CF card into a CF card slot (
A 43).
• Insert another CF card into the other CF card slot to use relay recording
(A 46) or double slot recording (A 47).
4 Attach a lens (A 33, 35).
5 To make 4K and 2K recordings, connect the camera to an external
recorder (
A 41).
6 Adjust the viewfinder.
NOTES
• The camera can add a user memo (A 97) to an MXF clip as you record. It can be used to store information
such as the clip name, camera operator and filming location. However, you must set the user memo before
recording.
Recording
1 Set the Q switch to CAMERA (A 26).
• The camera turns on in mode and enters
record pause mode.
• When a CF card is in the camera, the access
indicator for the CF card slot selected for recording
illuminates in red and then changes to green.
2 Open the [System Priority] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Priority]
Operating modes:
Tally lamp
Access indicators
Recording Video
52
3 Select [4K], [2K] or [MXF] and then press SET.
• The system priority changes to the selected menu item. Hereafter,
each mode will be referred to in this manual as “4K mode”, “2K
mode” and “MXF mode”, respectively.
• Select [4K] or [2K] to record a 4K or 2K clip* on an external recorder.
Select [MXF] to record only an MXF clip (HD video) on a CF card.
• During 4K mode, [RAW] appears on the upper right of the screen and
the icon appears on the rear panel.
* “Clip” refers to one movie unit from the point you press the START/STOP button to
start recording until you press again to pause the recording. You can also include custom picture settings (A 114) and metadata
(A 97) with MXF clips.
4 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.
• During 4K and 2K modes:
- Recording starts and a signal is sent to an external recorder
connected to the HD/SD SDI or 3G-SDI terminals instructing it
to start recording. [ÜREC `] appears at the upper center of
the screen and the tally lamp illuminates.
- If there is a CF card in a CF card slot, the camera
simultaneously records an MXF clip on the card. In such case,
[ÜREC] appears on the upper left of the screen.
- Depending on the aspect ratio of the 4K or 2K video, you can
select the resizing method when recordings on the CF card are
output (A 63).
• During MXF mode:
- Recording starts. The tally lamp illuminates and [ÜREC]
appears on the upper center of the screen.
- If an external recorder is connected to the HD/SD SDI terminal, a signal is sent instructing it to start
recording. [ÜREC`] appears on the center right of the screen.
• You can use the START/STOP button on the back of the camera, the front of the camera (next to the lens
mount), or the monitor unit.
5 Press the START/STOP button to pause the recording.
• Recording stops and a signal is sent to the external recorder to pause the recording. When recording on a
CF card, a clip is recorded and the camera enters record pause mode. [STBY`] or [STBY] appears at the
top of the screen. The tally lamp will also go out.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[System Priority]
[4K]
53
Recording Video
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do
so may result in permanent data loss.
- Do not open the CF card slot cover of the CF card slot being accessed and remove the CF card.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
• Be sure to save your recordings regularly (A 154), especially after making important recordings. Canon shall
not be liable for any loss or corruption of data.
NOTES
• By default, [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Rec Command] is set to [On]. With this function, when you connect the
camera to another device using the 3G-SDI terminals (in 4K and 2K modes) or HD/SD SDI terminal (in MXF
mode), if you start or stop recording with the camera, the other device will also start or stop recording.
Locking the Controls in Recording Mode
Once in mode, you can set the Q switch to C (key lock)
to lock all the physical controls (buttons and switches) on the camera*,
save for the START/STOP button. With the [w Other Functions] >
[Custom Function] > [C START/STOP] setting, you can even choose
to lock all buttons, including the START/STOP button. In such case, you
can use Wi-Fi Remote to operate the camera. This is useful in
preventing settings from being changed due to inadvertently pressing
one of the buttons. Return the Q switch to the CAMERA position
to reactivate the controls.
* The Wi-Fi Remote application also has a key lock function that is limited only to the
controls on the application’s screens (you will still be able to use the controls on the
camera). Press [D] to lock the application’s controls; press [C] to reactivate them.
About Clips
When the camera records an MXF clip, it also assigns a 6-character clip name consisting of a 2-character
prefix (letters or numerals) and 4 numerals (for example, “AA0001”). The last 4 numbers serve as a running
counter that increases every time a clip is recorded. You can set the initial clip name in advance using the [
4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Clip Name] > [Title Prefix] and [Number Setting] settings. You cannot change the clip
name after the clip is recorded.
In 4K and 2K modes, the clip name is included with the video signal that is output from the 3G-SDI terminals.
If you use the software Cinema RAW Development to develop RAW clips recorded with an external recorder
and export them, MXF clips recorded on a CF card and the exported files can be given similar names to make
post-production more efficient. In the following cases, the clip name is not sent to the external recorder.
• During MXF mode.
• When the CF card in the camera cannot be recorded on, does not have enough available space or has an access error.
• During 4K and 2K modes, when using the interval recording, frame recording or slow & fast motion
recording modes.
NOTES
• When recording MXF clips, the following apply.
- If you are recording with two CF cards and the CF card you are using becomes full while recording, the
clip will continue uninterrupted on the other CF card when relay recording (A 46) is activated. In such
case, the recording will be recorded as separate clips.
- If you record using the custom picture and metadata settings, those settings will be recorded with the
clip. For more details, refer to
Custom Picture Settings
(A 114) and
Using Metadata
(A 97).
- The video (stream) file in a clip will be split approximately every 2 GB for clips with a long recording time
(approximately every 1 GB during slow motion recording). Even in such case, playback will be continuous.
Recording Video
54
•By default, [w Other Functions] > [Fan] is set to [Automatic] and the internal cooling fan will be activated
during record pause mode. While recording, when the camera's internal temperature goes below a
predetermined level, the cooling fan will deactivate. You can also set the cooling fan to be activated at all
times.
• When recording MXF clips, the following apply.
- You can use [w Other Functions] > [Rec Review] (A 104) to review part or all of the last clip recorded.
- If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 111), you can press the button to
add an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded.
- You can use [w Other Functions] > [Delete Last Clip] (A 175) to delete the last clip recorded. However,
you cannot delete the last clip if double slot recording is on.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can start and stop recording from a Wi-Fi-enabled
device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 Press [LIVE VIEW ON/OFF] to show the camera’s live view image on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2 Press [START/STOP] to begin recording.
• The recording operation indicator changes from [STBY] to [ÜREC], the center of the START/STOP button
lights up in red and the time code display starts running on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
• Press [START/STOP] again to pause the recording.
Recording operation
Time code
55
Recording Video
Onscreen Displays
Refer to this section for an explanation of the various screen displays that appear in mode. You can use
the custom display function (
A 124) to turn off individual onscreen displays if they are not required.
When displaying the date and time (A 28):
1
The displayed value is an estimate.
2
Only when an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camera.
3
During 4K and 2K modes, when the shooting frame rate is enclosed by brackets, this indicates that both 3G-SDI terminals are
necessary to record the 3G-SDI output signal on an external recorder.
10 11 12 1413
15
18
16
17
19
20
21
1
2
3
6
5
7
4
8
9
25 26 2827 29 3330 31 32
22
23
24
34
1 CF card status/available recording time (A 56)
2 During 4K and 2K modes: CF card recording
operation (A 63)
During MXF mode: Remaining recording time for
double slot recording (A 47)
3 2 Current focal length of an attached EF lens
1
4Temperature warning / Fan
5ND filter (A 73)
6 View assistance (A 58)
7 Custom picture (A 114)
8 Key lock (A 53)
9 White balance (A 76)
10 Remaining battery time (A 56)
11 Wi-Fi
2
(A 50) white - connected to a Wi-Fi
network; yellow - connecting to or disconnecting
from a Wi-Fi network.
12 During 4K and 2K modes: Recording command
status
During MXF mode: Recording operation (A 56)
13 Character recording (A 123)
14 Genlock (A 88)
15 Time code (A 84)
16 Interval counter (A 105)
17 Available number of photos
18 Recording mode (A 60)/Bit rate (A 64)
19 Resolution (A 62, 64)
20 Frame rate (shooting frame rate
3
during slow &
fast motion mode) (A 60, 108)
21 During MXF mode: Recording command status
(A 170)
22 User memo (A 97)
23 User bit (A 87)
24 Audio output channel (A 96)
25 2 Aperture value (A 74)
26 ISO speed/Gain (A 70)
27 Magnification (A 80)
28 Shutter angle (A 67)
29 Peaking (A 80)
30 Lens warning (A 173)
31 Output displays (A 151)
32 Audio peak limiter (A 94)
33 Audio level meter (A 94, 95)
34 Date/time (A 28)
Recording Video
56
NOTES
• You can press the DISP. button to switch the onscreen displays in the following sequence.
Show all onscreen displays show only onscreen markers* hide all onscreen displays.
*Only when the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Markers] setting is enabled.
1 CF card status/available recording time
• The following indicates the CF card status.
2/3 Can record on CF card
4/5 No CF card or cannot record on CF card
The CF card selected for recording is indicated with a Ð mark.
2 CF card recording operation (4K and 2K modes)
• When double slot recording (A 46) is activated, the 4 icon will appear to the left of the operation
indicator.
10 Remaining battery time
• The icon shows a rough estimate of the remaining charge as a percentage of the full charge of the
battery pack. The remaining recording/playback time of the battery pack is displayed, in minutes, next to
the icon.
• è é ê ë ì (in red).
When ì is displayed, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.
• Depending on the conditions under which the camera and the battery pack are used, the actual battery
charge may not be indicated accurately.
12 Recording command status (4K and 2K modes) / Recording operation (MXF mode)
• In MXF mode, when double slot recording (A 47) is activated, the 4 icon will appear to the left of the
operation indicator. Also, ` does not appear in the indicator.
• Pre-recording is available only during MXF mode.
Ü
REC` Recording
STBY` Record pause
ÜINT REC` Interval recording
INT STBY (INT flashes)` Interval record pause
ÜFRM REC` Frame recording
ÜFRM STBY` Frame record pause (after starting recording)
FRM STBY (FRM flashes)` Frame record pause (before starting recording)
ÜS&F REC` Slow & fast motion recording
S&F STBY` Slow & fast motion record pause
ÜPRE REC Pre-recording (after pressing the START/STOP button)
PRE REC STBY Pre-recording (before pressing the START/STOP button)
57
Recording Video
Rear Panel Displays
You can check the following information on the rear panel. This allows you to easily adjust main camera functions
like the shutter speed, white balance and ISO speed/gain even when the monitor unit is not attached to the
camera without having to use the viewfinder.
1
Displayed also in mode.
2
In these shutter speed modes, only the denominator is displayed - indicates a shutter speed of 1/100, etc.
3
Only displayed while adjusting the setting.
4
Only when an optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is connected to the camera.
1
2
3
4
5
6789
10
11
12
13
1 White balance (A 76)
2 Time code settings: NDF Non-drop frame (A 85) /
EXT-LOCK External time code signal locked
(A 89) / HOLD Time code display on hold (A 85)
3 Time code (A 84)
4 Audio level meter
1
(A 94, 95)
5 White balance fine-tuning (A 77)
6 ISO speed/ Gain (A 70)
7 Shutter speed (A 67)/White balance
Shutter speed
2
(mode set to [Speed], [Slow]
or [Off])
Shutter speed (mode set to [Angle])
Shutter speed (mode set to [Clear Scan])
White balance fine-tuning
3
(A 77)
White balance, color temperature
3
(A 77)
8 2 Aperture value (A 74)
9ND filter (A 73)
10 RAW output (A 60)
11 Approximate remaining battery time
1
12 Wi-Fi
4
(A 50)
13 CF card status and available recording time
1
Adjusting the Brightness of the Rear Panel
Repeatedly pressing the (backlight) button will change the brightness of
the rear panel in the following order: Backlight on (bright) Backlight on
(dim) Backlight off.
Recording Video
58
Canon Log Gamma and CINEMA Preset
The Canon Log gamma setting makes full use of the newly developed image sensor to offer spectacular
dynamic range.
You can easily set the camera to use a number of preset picture-related
settings especially designed with professional cinematography and
motion picture production in mind. With the CINEMA preset settings, the
gamma and color matrix (A 117) will be set to the advanced Canon Log
setting, which makes full use of the newly developed image sensor to
offer spectacular dynamic range. On the other hand, other custom picture
settings will not be available.
Clips recorded using Canon Log gamma need to be processed in post-production. During post-production, you
can apply a LUT (lookup table) to clips recorded using Canon Log gamma to view the clips with more natural
colors. For details about available LUTs, visit your local Canon Web site.
* You can also apply a LUT to the MON. terminal or HD/SD SDI terminal output.
Setting CINEMA Preset
1Open the [/ CINEMA Locked] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [/ CINEMA Locked]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
• All picture-related settings will be set according to the CINEMA preset values. As such, you will not be able
to adjust custom picture settings.
•[/ LOCKED] appears on the left of the screen.
Checking Clips Recorded with Canon Log Gamma (View Assistance)
When Canon Log gamma is used, the image displayed on the screen will appear darker than usual. When you are
shooting with Canon Log gamma and are checking the picture on an external monitor connected to a MON. terminal
or the HD/SD SDI you can apply a LUT to the output (A 148). In addition, you can use the view assistance function
to display an image that approximates the one that would be obtained using normal gamma settings. View assistance
is only applied on the camera screen; it will not affect your recordings or the video signal output from the various
terminals.
1 Open the [View Assist.] submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [View Assist.]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
• O will appear on the lower left of the screen.
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [View Assist.] (A 111), you can press
the button to enable the view assistance function.
System
priority
Output terminal/
Recording destination
[/ CINEMA Locked]
setting
Picture setting
4K
2K
3G-SDI terminals – Canon Log gamma
MON. terminals – Canon Log gamma with or without a LUT applied
CF card
[On] CINEMA preset settings with Canon Log gamma
[Off] Based on custom picture settings
MXF CF card
[On] CINEMA preset settings with Canon Log gamma
[Off] Based on custom picture settings
[~ Camera Setup]
[/ CINEMA Locked]
[On]
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[View Assist.]
[Off]
59
Recording Video
Using the Internal Cooling Fan
During mode, the camera uses an internal cooling fan to reduce the camera’s internal heat.
1 Open the [Fan] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Fan]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Options
NOTES
• While the cooling fan is set to [Automatic], when you start the camera in a cooled down state and shoot in 4K
or 2K mode, the cooling fan will activate in approximately 10 minutes, based on a surrounding temperature of
25 °C (77 °F). Also, depending on the surrounding temperature, the cooling fan may stop after a short period
of time or continue to operate.
Operating modes:
[On]: The cooling fan is active at all times regardless of the camera’s
internal temperature.
[Automatic]: During record pause mode, the cooling fan is always activated. While
you are recording (while [Ü REC] appears on the screen), if the
camera’s internal temperature lowers to a predetermined level, the
cooling fan will deactivate. If the camera’s internal temperature rises to a
predetermined level, the cooling fan will activate automatically ( will
appear on the screen), even while you are recording.
[w Other Functions]
[Fan]
[Automatic]
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
60
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
Before you shoot, select the type of recording, resolution (frame size), frame rate and other settings that best
match your creative needs. The options available will depend on whether the camera is in 4K mode, 2K mode or
MXF mode, as well as the system frequency setting.
Selecting the Video Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes
To set the video configuration, select the system frequency, system priority, recording mode, resolution, and
frame rate, as necessary. For a summary of the video configuration, refer to the table following the procedures
below.
Selecting the System Priority
When you select the system priority, you can have the camera output 4K
or 2K image data.
1 Open the [System Priority] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Priority]
2 Select [4K] or [2K] and then press SET.
• The camera will switch to the selected mode. If the camera was in
MXF mode, it will restart in the selected mode.
Selecting the System Frequency
1 Open the [System Frequency] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Frequency]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• The camera will restart in the selected mode.
• In this manual, recordings with a system frequency of 59.94 Hz,
50.00 Hz and 24.00 Hz are referred to as 59.94 Hz recordings,
50.00 Hz recordings and 24.00 Hz recordings, respectively.
Selecting the Recording Mode
For 4K mode, the recording mode determines whether the vertical
resolution is 2160 pixels (RAW) or 1080 pixels (HRAW or 4K1K RAW). For
2K mode, it determines the color sampling and bit depth.
1 Open the [Mode] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)] or [2K (2048/1920)] >
[Mode]
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[System Priority]
[4K]
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[System Frequency]
[59.94 Hz] or [50.00 Hz]*
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[4K (4096/3840)]
[Mode]
[RAW]
61
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
2 Select the desired recording mode and then press SET.
Available recording modes by system priority
NOTES
• During slow & fast motion recording, when you want to set the shooting frame rate to 1 to 60P (for 59.94 Hz
recordings) or 1 to 50P (for 50.00 Hz recordings), we recommend you set [Mode] to [RAW], [ 12-bit] or
[ 10-bit].
System priority Recording mode Description
4K
RAW
Standard recording mode for 4K clips. This recording mode
features a 10-bit bit depth and should be used if you plan to
develop the clip using the Cinema RAW Development
software (A 152).
HRAW
Recording mode for use with slow & fast motion recording
(A 108) when you want to set the shooting frame rate
from 62 to 120P (for 59.94 Hz recordings) or 52 to 100P (for
50.00 Hz recordings).
4K1K RAW
Recording mode that features half the vertical resolution of
RAW recording. You can set the shooting frame rate from 62
to 120P (for 59.94 recordings) or 52 to 100P (for 50.00 Hz
recordings). This recording mode can be used with slow &
fast motion recording. When you develop the clip using the
Cinema RAW Development software (A 152), you
can covert it using options such as 4K1K video, 4K2K video
(letterboxed) and 2K/1K video/full HD video (side-cropped).
2K
12-bit Standard recording modes for 2K clips. These recording
modes use the RGB color space, 4:4:4 color sampling, and
have a 12-bit or 10-bit bit depth. High image quality than
10-bit mode.
10-bit
10-bit
Recording mode for use with slow & fast motion recording
(A 108) when you want to set the shooting frame rate
from 62 to 120P (for 59.94 Hz recordings) or 52 to 100P (for
50.00 Hz recordings). This recording mode uses the YCC
color space, 4:2:2 color sampling, and has a 10-bit bit
depth.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[2K (2048/1920)]
[Mode]
[ 12-bit]
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
62
Selecting the Resolution
1 Open the [Resolution] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)] or [2K (2048/1920)] >
[Resolution]
2 Select the desired resolution and then press SET.
• Available resolution options depend on the system priority and
recording mode settings.
Selecting the Frame Rate
This procedure is not necessary for 24.00 Hz recordings because the
frame rate will automatically be set to [24.00P].
1 Open the [Frame Rate] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)] or [2K (2048/1920)] >
[Frame Rate]
2 Select the desired frame rate and then press SET.
• The available frame rates depend on the system priority, system
frequency, recording mode and resolution settings.
NOTES
• Onscreen displays representing the mode, resolution and frame rate
that you selected will appear on the upper right of the screen.
• For details on the signal output from the 3G-SDI terminals, refer to
Connecting to a 4K- or 2K-Compatible
External Recorder
(A 41). For details on the signal output from the other terminals, refer to
Video Output
Configuration
(A 141).
Available system frequency, system priority, recording mode, resolution, and frame rate settings
System priority
System frequency 59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz 24.00 Hz
Mode / Resolution
Frame rate
23.98P 29.97P 59.94P 25.00P 50.00P 24.00P
4K
RAW / 4096×2160 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
HRAW/ 4096×1080 – – Ü – Ü –
4K1K RAW / 4096x1080 – – Ü – Ü –
RAW / 3840×2160 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
HRAW/ 3840×1080 – – Ü – Ü –
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[4K (4096/3840)]
[Resolution]
[4096x2160]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[2K (2048/1920)]
[Resolution]
[2048x1080]
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[4K (4096/3840)]
[2K (2048/1920)]
[Frame Rate]
[23.98] or [25.00P]*
63
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
Recording MXF Clips on a CF Card During 4K and 2K Modes
While recording on an external recorder in 4K and 2K modes, the camera can simultaneously record an MXF clip
on a CF card inserted in the camera, except during special recording modes. The selected video configuration
for 4K and 2K modes will be converted to HD video and recorded onto the CF card. You can select the video
configuration of the MXF clips that are recorded on the CF card.
Video configuration recorded on CF card
*HRAW only.
Selecting the Resizing Method When Converting to HD Video
When converting 4K or 2K image data with a resolution of 4096x2160, 4096x1080 or 2048x1080 to MXF video
with a resolution of 1920x1080, you can select how it will be recorded on a CF card or output from the HD/SD
SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal (only when [HD-Y] is selected).
1 Open the [Resize MXF Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Resize MXF Output]
2 Select [Letterbox], [Squeeze] or [Side Crop] and then press SET.
• The options are the same as those listed for
Selecting the Resizing
Method
(A 147).
2K
12-bit / 2048×1080 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
10-bit / 2048×1080 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
10-bit / 2048×1080 – – Ü – Ü –
12-bit / 1920×1080 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
10-bit / 1920×1080 Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü
10-bit / 1920×1080 – – Ü – Ü –
Video configuration for external recording Video configuration recorded on CF card
System priority Recording mode Resolution Frame rate Bit rate / Resolution Frame rate
4K
RAW
4096×2160
3840×2160
59.94P
50 Mbps / 1920x1080
35 Mbps / 1920x1080
25 Mbps / 1440x1080
29.97P
29.97P
23.98P 23.98P
50.00P
25.00P
25.00P
24.00P 50 Mbps / 1920x1080 24.00P
HRAW
4K1K RAW
4096×1080
3840×1080*
59.94P
50 Mbps / 1280x720
35 Mbps / 1280x720
59.94P
50.00P 50.00P
2K
12-bit
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
50 Mbps / 1920x1080
35 Mbps / 1920x1080
25 Mbps / 1440x1080
29.97P
29.97P
23.98P 23.98P
50.00P
25.00P
25.00P
24.00P 50 Mbps / 1920x1080 24.00P
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
50 Mbps / 1280x720
35 Mbps / 1280x720
59.94P
50.00P 50.00P
System priority
System frequency 59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz 24.00 Hz
Mode / Resolution
Frame rate
23.98P 29.97P 59.94P 25.00P 50.00P 24.00P
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Resize MXF Output]
[Letterbox]
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
64
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [Resize MXF Output] (A 111), you can press the button to switch the
resizing method.
• During 4K and 2K modes, the picture output from the 3G-SDI terminals and the picture recorded on a CF card
will differ in image quality due to differences in the signal processing algorithm.
• Because the camera uses a simple resize conversion process vertically, diagonal lines may appear jagged.
Selecting the Video Configuration for MXF Mode
To set the video configuration, select the system frequency, system priority, bit rate and resolution, and frame
rate, as necessary. For a summary of the video configuration, refer to the table following the procedures below.
Selecting the System Priority
1 Open the [System Priority] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Priority]
2 Select [MXF] and then press SET.
• The camera will restart in MXF mode.
Selecting the System Frequency
1 Open the [System Frequency] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Frequency]
2 Select a desired option and then press SET.
• The camera will restart in the selected mode.
Selecting the Bit Rate and Resolution
1 Open the [Bit Rate/Resolution] submenu to set the bit rate and
resolution.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MXF] > [Bit Rate/Resolution]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• The selected bit rate and resolution will appear on the upper right of
the screen.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[System Priority]
[4K]
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[System Frequency]
[59.94 Hz] or [50.00 Hz]*
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MXF]
[Bit Rate/Resolution]
[50 Mbps 1920x1080]
65
Video Configuration: Type of Recording, Resolution and Frame Rate
Selecting the Frame Rate
This procedure is not necessary for 24.00 Hz recordings.
1 Open the [Frame Rate] submenu to set the frame rate.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MXF] > [Frame Rate]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• The selected frame rate will appear on the upper right of the screen.
NOTES
• A single CF card cannot be used to record clips with different system
frequencies (59.94 Hz/50.00 Hz/24.00 Hz).
Available bit rate, resolution and frame rate settings
* The first line indicates the bit rate (in Mbps); the second line indicates in parentheses whether the bit rate is constant (CBR) or
variable (VBR), and the color sampling. The recordings have 8-bit bit depth.
Bit rate
*
System frequency
59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz 24.00 Hz
Resolution
Frame rate
59.94i 59.94P 29.97P 23.98P 50.00i 50.00P 25.00P 24.00P
50 Mbps
(CBR 4:2:2)
1920×1080 Ü – Ü Ü Ü – Ü Ü
1280×720 – Ü Ü Ü – Ü Ü Ü
35 Mbps
(VBR 4:2:0)
1920×1080 Ü – Ü Ü Ü – Ü –
1280×720 – Ü Ü Ü – Ü Ü –
25 Mbps
(CBR 4:2:0)
1440×1080 Ü – Ü Ü Ü – Ü –
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MXF]
[Frame Rate]
[23.98P] or [25.00P]*
Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC. Button
66
Changing Main Camera Functions with the FUNC. Button
You can adjust three main camera functions –shutter speed, white balance and ISO speed/gain– using the
FUNC. button (direct setting mode). In direct setting mode, you can change settings using the LCD screen/
viewfinder or using only the rear panel, which is convenient when the monitor unit is not attached to the camera.
This section will explain the basic operation of the direct setting mode. For specific details about the functions
please refer to the each function’s section: shutter speed (A 67), white balance (A 76), ISO speed/gain
(A 70).
Using the Direct Setting Mode
1 Press the FUNC. button.
• On the screen: The onscreen display of the function to be adjusted
will be highlighted in orange.
On the rear panel: Only the icon (white balance) or value (ISO
speed, gain, shutter speed) of the function to be adjusted will be
displayed.
• Repeatedly pressing the FUNC. button or pushing the joystick left/
right will change the function to be adjusted in the following order:
White balance Color temperature/preset white balance ISO
speed/gain Shutter speed Direct setting mode off.
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired value (ISO speed, gain,
shutter speed) or desired white balance mode and then press SET.
• The selected value will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode.
• On the screen: The onscreen display of the selected function will return to normal.
On the rear panel: The display will return to normal (all displays will reappear).
• Depending on the function selected, additional adjustment may be possible or necessary before pressing
SET.
NOTES
• The camera will automatically end the direct setting mode in the following cases.
- If no operation was performed for more than 6 seconds.
- If the menu, custom picture menu or a status screen was opened.
- If the aperture was adjusted or the ND filter setting was changed.
- If the control dial’s function is set to [ISO/Gain] and you operate the control dial while adjusting the white
balance or shutter speed in direct setting mode.
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC.] (A 111), you can press that button instead of the FUNC. button to
enter the direct setting mode.
Operating modes:
67
Shutter Speed
Shutter Speed
Set the shutter speed based on the recording conditions. For example, you may want to set slower shutter
speeds in darker environments. The camera offers the following 5 modes.
[Speed]: Allows you to set the shutter speed (in fractions of a second). You can select the increment to use when
adjusting the shutter speed between 1/3-stop and 1/4-stop increments.
[Angle]: You can set the shutter angle to determine the shutter speed.
[Clear Scan]: Set the frequency in order to record CRT computer monitors without displaying black bands or
flicker on the screen.
[Slow]: You can set slower shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting. This
mode is not available during slow & fast motion recording mode.
[Off]: The camera uses a standard shutter speed based on the frame rate.
Operating modes:
Available Shutter Speeds
The available shutter speeds vary depending on the frame rate.
1
During slow & fast motion recording mode, available values will vary depending on the selected shooting frame rate.
2
In the Wi-Fi Remote application, all shutter speeds (1/3-stop and 1/4-stop increments) will be available from the same list.
3
Not available during slow & fast motion recording mode.
Shutter speed mode
Frame rate (59.94 Hz and 24.00 Hz recordings)
59.94i / 59.94P 29.97P 23.98P / 24.00P
Off
1
1/60 1/30 1/24
Speed
1,2
1/3-stop
increments
1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640,
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100,
1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000,
1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250,
1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800,
1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
1/4-stop
increments
1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150,
1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 1/360,
1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720, 1/840,
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700,
1/2000
1/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90,
1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210, 1/250,
1/300, 1/360, 1/420, 1/500, 1/600, 1/720,
1/840, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1700,
1/2000
1/24, 1/30, 1/34, 1/40, 1/48, 1/60, 1/75,
1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210,
1/250, 1/300, 1/360, 1/420, 1/500, 1/600,
1/720,1/840, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400,
1/1700, 1/2000
Angle
1
360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°, 90°,
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°
360°, 240°, 216°, 180°, 120°, 108°,
90°, 60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°,
11.25°
360°, 345.6°, 288°, 240°, 180°,
172.8°, 144°, 120°, 90°, 86.4°, 72°,
60°, 45°, 30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°
Clear Scan
1
59.94 Hz to 250.27 Hz 29.97Hz to 250.27 Hz 23.98 Hz or 24.00 Hz to 250.27 Hz
Slow
3
1/4, 1/8, 1/15, 1/30 1/4, 1/8, 1/15 1/3, 1/6, 1/12
Shutter speed mode
Frame rate (50.00 Hz recordings)
50.00i / 50.00P 25.00P
Off
1
1/50 1/25
Speed
1,2
1/3-stop
increments
1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320,
1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000
1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160,
1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000,
1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
1/4-stop
increments
1/50, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120, 1/150, 1/180, 1/210,
1/250, 1/300, 1/350, 1/400, 1/500, 1/600, 1/700, 1/800,
1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1600, 1/2000
1/25, 1/29, 1/33, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/75, 1/90, 1/100, 1/120,
1/150, 1/180, 1/210, 1/250, 1/300, 1/350, 1/400, 1/500, 1/600,
1/700, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1200, 1/1400, 1/1600, 1/2000
Angle
1
360°, 300°, 240°, 180°, 150°, 120°, 90°, 60°, 45°, 30°,
22.5°, 15°, 11.25°
360°, 300°, 240°, 180°, 150°, 120°, 90°, 75°, 60°, 45°,
30°, 22.5°, 15°, 11.25°
Clear Scan
1
50.00 Hz to 250.78 Hz 25.00 Hz to 250.78 Hz
Slow
3
1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/25 1/3, 1/6, 1/12
Shutter Speed
68
Changing the Shutter Speed Mode and Value
1 Open the shutter [Mode] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Mode]
2 Select the desired mode and then press SET.
• If you selected [Speed] you can select the increment scale to use
when adjusting the shutter speed; otherwise, skip to step 5.
3 Open the [Shutter Increment] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Shutter] > [Shutter Increment]
4 Select [1/3 stop] or [1/4 stop] and then press SET.
5 Adjust the shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency
using the direct setting mode.
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the shutter speed
display, select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer
to
Using the Direct Setting Mode
(A 66).
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. Shutter] (A 111), you can
press the button to enter the direct setting mode with the shutter speed
highlighted and ready to be adjusted.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the shutter speed remotely from a Wi-Fi-
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 Press [ANGLE] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2 Select the desired mode.
3 Press the current shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency and select the desired value
from the list.
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera.
[~ Camera Setup]
[Shutter]
[Mode]
[Angle]
[~ Camera Setup]
[Shutter]
[Shutter Increment]
[1/4 stop]
69
Shutter Speed
NOTES
• When recording under artificial light sources such as fluorescent, mercury or halogen lamps, the screen may
flicker depending on the shutter speed. You may be able to avoid flicker by setting the shutter mode to
[Speed] and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system: 1/50* or 1/100
(for 50 Hz recordings) or 1/60 or 1/120 (for 60 Hz recordings).
* May not be available depending on the frame rate.
• Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the picture to appear soft or out
of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction, use a faster shutter speed, a denser ND filter
(A 73) or open up the aperture.
• When the shutter speed mode is set to [Slow], bright red, green or blue dots may appear on the screen. In
such case, use a faster shutter speed or select a lower ISO speed or gain value (A 70).
• Even when using the [C9: EOS Std.] preset custom picture file, if you set the camera to a certain shutter
speed, you may not get the exactly the same image brightness as you would on an EOS digital SLR camera
set to the same shutter speed.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can change the shutter mode
with the remote controller’s SHUTTER SELECT button.
Using Slow Shutter Mode
When recording in dark surroundings, you can obtain a brighter picture by using slow shutter mode. You can
also use this mode when you wish to add certain effects to your recordings, such as blurring the background
during panning shots or recording a moving subject with an afterimage trail.
• Image quality may not be as good as when using faster shutter speeds in brighter surroundings.
ISO Speed/Gain
70
ISO Speed/Gain
Depending on the shooting conditions you may want to adjust the brightness of the image. You can do so by
changing the ISO speed or gain value to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor.
Available ISO speed and gain settings
1
Settings available only when [~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [Extended Range] is set to [On].
2
The minimum and maximum ISO speeds are available even when the 1-stop increment scale is selected.
3
ISO speed required for a suitable dynamic range for Canon Log gamma. Equivalent to a gain value of 2.5 dB.
4
This value is only available when [Extended Range] is set to [Off].
Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value
1 Open the ISO Speed/Gain [Select] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [Select]
2 Select [ISO] or [Gain] and then press SET.
If you selected [ISO] (the default value):
3 Open the [ISO Increment] submenu to select the increment to
use when adjusting the ISO speed.
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [ISO Increment]
4 Select [1 stop] or [1/3 stop] and then press SET.
5 Adjust the ISO speed using the direct setting mode.
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the ISO speed
display, select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer
to
Using the Direct Setting Mode
(A 66).
If you selected [Gain]:
3 Open the [Gain] submenu to select the increment to use when
adjusting the gain.
[~ Camera Setup] > [ISO/Gain] > [Gain]
4 Select [Normal] (3-dB increment) or [Fine] (0.5-dB increment) and
then press SET.
5 Adjust the gain using the direct setting mode.
• Repeatedly press the FUNC. button to highlight the gain display,
select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer to
Using
the Direct Setting Mode
(A 66).
Operating modes:
Increment Normal range Extended range
1
ISO Speed
1-stop increments 320
2
, 400, 800, <850>
3
, 1600, 3200, 6400, 12800, 20000
2, 4
25600, 51200, 80000
2
1/3-stop increments
320, 400, 500, 640, 800, <850>
3
, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12800, 16000,
20000
25600, 32000, 40000, 51200,
64000, 80000
Gain
Normal
-6 dB, -3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB,
21 dB, 24 dB, 27 dB, 30 dB
33 dB, 36 dB, 39 dB, 42 dB
Fine 0 dB to 24 dB in 0.5 dB increments –
[~ Camera Setup]
[ISO/Gain]
[Select]
[ISO]
[~ Camera Setup]
[ISO/Gain]
[ISO Increment]
[1/3 stop]
[~ Camera Setup]
[ISO/Gain]
[Gain]
[Normal]
71
ISO Speed/Gain
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. ISO/Gain] (A 111), you can press the button to enter the direct
setting mode with the ISO speed/gain highlighted and ready to be adjusted.
Using the Control Dial
You can adjust the value of the ISO speed or gain using the control dial
on the camera. When you have attached the grip unit of the C300 /
C300 PL or C100 to the camera, you can select the function assigned
to each control dial independently.
You will need to set the control dial’s function to [ISO/Gain] in advance.
Assigning ISO Speed/Gain Control to the Control Dial
1 Open the [Control Dial] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control Dial]*
* When you are assigning the function to the control dial on the grip unit of the
C300 / C300 PL or C100, select [Grip Ctrl Dial] instead.
2 Select [ISO/Gain] and then press SET.
Changing the ISO Speed or Gain Value
To select whether to change the ISO speed or the gain, perform steps 1 to 4
in the previous procedure. Turn the control dial to set the desired ISO speed
or gain value.
NOTES
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control
Dial Dir.] or [Grip Dial Dir.] setting (A 123) to change the direction of the
adjustment when you turn the control dial on the camera or on the grip
unit of the C300 / C300 PL or C100, respectively.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the ISO speed/gain remotely from a Wi-Fi-
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 To change the gain value, press [ISO] and then [Gain] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2 Press the current ISO speed or gain value and select the desired value from the list.
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera.
Control dial
[w Other Functions]
[Custom Function]
[Control Dial]
2 [Iris], 3 [Off]
ISO Speed/Gain
72
NOTES
• When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set, the picture may flicker slightly.
• When high ISO speeds or gain levels are set, bright red, green or blue dots may appear on the screen. In such
case, use a faster shutter speed (A 67) or select a lower ISO speed or gain value.
• When the ISO speed or gain level is changed, some noise may appear momentarily on the screen. Do not
adjust the ISO speed/gain level while recording.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can adjust the ISO speed or
gain value with the remote controller’s ISO/GAIN Í/Î buttons.
73
ND Filter
ND Filter
Using the ND filters allows you keep the aperture within an appropriate
range when recording in bright surroundings*.
* Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the
picture to appear soft or out of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction,
use a denser ND filter or a faster shutter speed (A 67).
Using the ND Filter
Press the ND FILTER + or - button to select the desired ND filter setting.
• Repeatedly pressing ND FILTER + button will change the ND filter setting in the following order: [ND1 2 stops]
[ND2 4 stops] [ND3 6 stops] ND filter off. (The ND FILTER - button cycles through the settings in
reverse order.)
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the ND filter
remotely from a Wi-Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
Press [ND +] or [ND -] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
• The function is identical to that of the ND FILTER + and - buttons on the
camera.
• The selected ND filter setting will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and
will be applied on the camera.
NOTES
• Depending on the scene, the color may change when turning the ND filter on/off. Setting a custom white
balance (A 76) may be effective in such case.
• If you set an assignable button to [ND -] or [ND +] (A 111), you can press the button to adjust the ND filter.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can use the remote
controller’s ND button in the same way as the camera’s ND FILTER + button.
Operating modes:
2 Adjusting the Aperture
74
2 Adjusting the Aperture
You can affect the brightness of your recordings or change the depth of field by adjusting the aperture. For
example, use a small aperture value for a shallow depth of field that isolates the subject in focus and nicely blurs
the background. Available aperture values will vary depending on the EF lens attached to the camera.
Using the Control Dial
You can adjust the aperture value of most EF lenses using the control
dial on the camera. When you have attached the grip unit of the
C300 / C300 PL or C100 to the camera, you can select the function
assigned to each control dial independently.
By default the control dial’s function is set to aperture control. If it has
been changed, follow the procedure below to set the control dial’s
function to [Iris] in advance.
Assigning Aperture Control to the Control Dial
1 Open the [Control Dial] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control Dial]*
* When you are assigning the function to the control dial on the grip unit of the C300 /
C300 PL or C100, select [Grip Ctrl Dial] instead.
2 Select [Iris] and then press SET.
Selecting the Increment Scale to Use When Adjusting the
Aperture
1 Open the [Iris Increment] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Iris Increment]
2 Select [1/2 stop], [1/3 stop] or [Fine] and then press SET.
Changing the Aperture Value
Turn the control dial to adjust the aperture.
• The selected aperture value will appear on the lower left of the screen.
•When [~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Iris Increment] is set to [Fine], the
actual increments will be smaller than 1/3 stop but the onscreen display
will show the closest 1/3-stop aperture value.
NOTES
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Control Dial Dir.] or [Grip Dial Dir.] setting
(A 123) to change the direction of the adjustment when you turn the control dial.
Operating modes:
Control dial
[w Other Functions]
[Custom Function]
[Control Dial]
[Iris]
[~ Camera Setup]
[Iris]
[Iris Increment]
[1/3 stop]
75
2 Adjusting the Aperture
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the aperture value remotely from a Wi-Fi-
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 Press the current aperture value on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2 Select the desired aperture value from the list.
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.
• Alternatively, you can press IRIS [+] to open the aperture or IRIS [-] to close the aperture in 1/8-stop
increments. (Onscreen displays will show the closest 1/3-stop aperture value.)
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the lens.
NOTES
• When using an EF lens with no lens contacts or an EF Cinema lens (except for a CINE-SERVO CN7x17 KAS
S/E1 lens), you cannot adjust the aperture using the camera. Adjust the aperture using the lens.
• When using an EF lens that can correct the aperture value according to the position of the zoom, you can use
the [~ Camera Setup] > [Iris] > [Zoom-Iris Correct.] setting to activate this correction.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can adjust the aperture with
the remote controller’s IRIS dial. By default, turn the dial right to open up the aperture (smaller F value) and left
to close the aperture (larger F value).
White Balance
76
White Balance
The camera uses an electronic white balance process to calibrate the picture and ensure accurate colors under
different lighting conditions. There are 3 methods of setting the white balance.
Custom white balance: You can use a white object to establish the white balance and set it to one of two custom
white balance positions, ÅA or ÅB.
Set color temperature: Allows you to set the color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K.
Preset white balance: Set the white balance to ¼ (daylight) or É (incandescent lamp). Preset white balance
settings can be further fine-tuned within a range of -9 to 9.
When recording under fluorescent lights, we recommend setting the custom white balance.
NOTES
• When recording on a CF card, the [Color Matrix] and [White Balance] custom picture settings (A 121) take
precedence over the white balance settings.
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Shockless WB] setting (A 123) to make the
transition look smoother when you change the white balance settings.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can adjust the white balance
with the remote controller’s A/B, PRESET and Å buttons.
Setting the White Balance
1 Set the white balance mode using the direct setting mode.
• Press the FUNC. button to highlight the white balance icon and select
the desired white balance mode.
• To apply the setting as it is, press SET. To establish the custom white
balance, fine-tune the preset white balance settings or change the
color temperature, continue the procedure as described below before
pressing SET.
• For details refer to
Using the Direct Setting Mode
(A 66).
If you selected one of the custom white balance settings ÅA or ÅB:
If a custom white balance has not yet been stored, the custom white
balance icon ÅA or ÅB and default value (5,500 K) will flash slowly.
To establish the custom white balance:
2 Point the camera at a white object so that it fills the whole screen.
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording.
3Press the Å button.
•The Å A or Å B icon will flash quickly.
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.
• After the icon stops flashing, the procedure is completed and the camera will exit the direct setting mode.
The setting is retained even if you turn off the camera.
Operating modes:
77
White Balance
If you selected one of the preset white balance settings, ¼ or É:
You can fine-tune the preset values within a range of -9 to 9.
2 Press the Å button or push the joystick right.
• On the screen: The adjustment value ±0 will appear next to the white balance icon, highlighted in orange.
On the rear panel: The adjustment value ±0 will appear.
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the adjustment value and then press SET.
• The selected adjustment value will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode.
• On the screen: The selected adjustment value will appear next to the white balance icon.
On the rear panel: The adjustment value display will disappear and the display will return to normal (all displays
will reappear). The white balance fine-tuning icon Ê will appear to indicate that an adjustment has been made.
If you selected the color temperature setting, È:
You can set the color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K in 100 K increments.
2 Press the Å button or push the joystick right.
• On the screen: The default color temperature value (5,500 K) will be highlighted in orange.
On the rear panel: The default color temperature value will appear.
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to change the color temperature value and then
press SET.
• The selected color temperature will be set and the camera will exit the direct setting mode.
• On the screen: The selected color temperature will appear next to the white balance icon.
On the rear panel: The color temperature value will disappear and the display will return to normal (all
displays will reappear).
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [FUNC. WB] (A 111), you can press the button to enter the direct setting
mode with the white balance icon highlighted and ready to be adjusted.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the white balance remotely from a Wi-Fi-
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 Press [ÅA] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2 Select the desired white balance mode.
If you selected ¼, É or È:
3 Press the adjustment value [Ê ±0] (¼, É) or color temperature [5500K] (È) and then select the
desired value from the list.
• You may need to scroll up/down to see all the available values.
White Balance
78
• The selected value will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and will be applied on the camera.
If you selected ÅA or ÅB:
3 Point the camera at a white object so that it fills the whole screen.
• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use when recording.
• Make sure the white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.
4Press [Å].
• If a custom white balance has not yet been stored, [Å] will flash slowly.
• During the procedure, [Å] will flash quickly. When it stops flashing, the procedure is completed and the
setting will be applied on the camera.
NOTES
• Using the custom white balance setting:
- Readjust the custom white balance if you turn the ND filter on/off or when the light source has changed.
- Very rarely and depending on the light source, Å may keep flashing (it will change to a slow flashing). You
can still use the setting even in such case.
White balance fine-tuning
Color temperature
79
Adjusting the Focus
Adjusting the Focus
The camera does not have automatic focus control and focusing is done manually using the focus ring on the
attached lens. Nevertheless, the camera offers focus assistance functions to help you adjust the focus more
accurately.
2 only: You can adjust the focus of an attached EF lens remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
Adjusting the Focus Manually
Turn the focus ring on the attached lens to adjust the focus.
1 If the attached lens is equipped with an automatic focus function, set the lens to manual focus mode
in advance.
• Refer to the instruction manual of the lens used.
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
• 2 Set the focus mode switch of the EF lens to MF in advance.
NOTES
• 2 On some EF lenses, you can turn the focus ring to adjust the focus even when focus mode switch is set
to AF.
2 Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can adjust the focus remotely from a Wi-Fi-enabled
device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 Set the focus mode switch on the EF lens to AF (autofocus) mode.
2 Press one of the focus controls to adjust the focus as necessary.
• Press one of the controls on the [NEAR] side to focus closer or one of the controls on the [FAR] side to focus
farther away.
• There are three levels of adjustment - [ ]/[ ] is the smallest and [ ]/[ ] the largest.
Operating modes:
Adjusting the Focus
80
NOTES
• If the focus mode switch on the EF lens is set to MF, you will not be able control the focus through remote
operation. Depending on the lens used, remote operation may not work correctly.
• If you operate the zoom after focusing, the focus on the subject may be lost.
• If you focus manually and then leave the camera with the power turned on, the focus on the subject may be
lost after a while. This possible slight shift in focus is a result of the internal temperature rising in the camera
and lens. Check the focus before resuming shooting.
• While the camera is focusing, do not touch the end of the lens or focus ring while they are moving.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, you can adjust the focus with the
remote controller’s FOCUS dial. Turn the dial right to focus farther and left to focus nearer.
Using the Focus Assistance Functions
In order to focus more accurately, you can use two focus assistance functions – peaking, which creates a clearer
contrast by emphasizing the outlines of the subject, and magnification, which enlarges the image on the screen.
You can use both functions simultaneously for greater effect.
You can also use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [F. Assist. B&W] setting (A 123) to switch
the screen and output from the MON. terminals to black & white while using the focus assistance functions.
Peaking
The camera offers two peaking levels to help you focus more accurately.
1 Press the PEAKING button.
• The peaking icon (J or K) appears at the lower center of the
screen and the outlines in the image on the screen will be
emphasized, depending on the focus.
• Press the button again to turn off peaking.
• Alternatively, you can use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Peaking]
setting to turn peaking on and off.
2 Open the [Select] submenu (under [Peaking]) to select the peaking level.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Select] (under [Peaking])
3 Select the desired level and then press SET.
• You can use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Peaking 1] and [Peaking 2]
> [Color], [Gain] and [Frequency] settings to set the color, gain and
frequency of the two peaking levels independently of each other.
However, only [Color] will be applied to an external monitor
connected to the MON. 1 terminal. Perform the following procedure
to adjust the peaking gain on an external monitor.
To adjust the peaking gain on an external monitor
1 Open the [Peaking Gain] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1] > [Peaking Gain]
2 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to set the level and
then press SET.
Magnification
1 Press the MAGN. button.
• ^ appears at the lower center of the screen and the center of the
picture is magnified approximately 2 times*.
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[Select]
(under [Peaking])
[Peaking 1]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1]
[Peaking Gain]
[10]
81
Adjusting the Focus
• A white frame representing the whole screen area is displayed on the top left of the screen. The orange
frame within it represents the approximate part of the image shown magnified.
2 If necessary, use the joystick (ÝÞ) or SELECT dial to move the orange frame around and check other
parts of the image.
• You can move the orange frame 5 steps vertically or horizontally. Press the CANCEL button to return the
magnification frame to the center position.
3 Press the button again to cancel the magnification.
* The magnification that appears on the LCD screen, viewfinder screen and external monitor is different. The magnification also
differs based on the video configuration.
NOTES
• Peaking appears on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON. 1 terminal.
Magnification appears on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON.1 or MON. 2
terminal. They will not appear when using the other terminals.
• Peaking/Magnification will not affect recordings made on a CF card.
• When using the camera’s screen to focus:
- The camera features professional video scopes (A 100). You can display the edge monitor to help you
focus even more accurately.
- You can use peaking together with the edge monitor. In such case, the gain and frequency of the peaking
effect will be adjusted automatically according to the gain settings of the edge monitor.
• You can use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Magn. Add. Disp.] setting to activate peaking
and the edge monitor while the picture on the screen is being magnified.
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns
82
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns
Using onscreen markers allows you to make sure your subject is correctly framed and is within the appropriate
safe area. The zebra patterns help you identify areas that are overexposed. The onscreen displays and zebra
pattern appear on the camera screen and an external monitor connected to the MON. 1 terminal. The onscreen
markers and zebra pattern will not affect recordings made on a CF card or the signal output from the 3G-SDI
and MON. 2 terminals.
Displaying Onscreen Markers
The camera offers 5 types of onscreen markers. You can display multiple
onscreen markers simultaneously.
1 Open the [Markers] submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Markers]
2 Select a marker you wish to display, select [White] or [Gray] and
then press SET.
• Select [Off] to turn off the selected marker.
• You can display multiple markers simultaneously. Repeat this step as
necessary.
• If you selected [Safety Zone] or [Aspect Marker], continue to step 3.
Otherwise, you can skip to step 4.
3 Select [Safety Zone Area] or [Aspect Ratio], select the desired option and then press SET.
4 Select [Enable], select [On] and then press SET to enable the onscreen markers.
• All of the selected onscreen markers will be displayed.
• Select [Off] to turn off all onscreen markers.
Options
Operating modes:
[Center]: Displays a small marker that indicates the center of the screen.
[Horizontal]: Displays a horizontal line to help you compose level shots.
[Grid]: Displays a grid that allows you to frame your shots correctly (horizontally and vertically).
[Safety Zone]: Displays indicators that show various safe areas, such as the action safe area and text safe area.
Available options for [Safety Zone Area] are [80%], [90%], [92.5%] and [95%].
[Aspect Marker]: Displays markers that indicate various aspect ratios to help you keep your shot within that area.
Available options for [Aspect Ratio] are [2.35:1], [1.85:1], [1.75:1], [1.66:1], [14:9], [13:9] and [4:3].
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[Markers]
[Center]
[
Horizontal]
[Grid]
[Safety Zone]
[Aspect Marker]
[Off]
Aspect guide 4:3
Level marker
Safety zone 80%
83
Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns
NOTES
• You can turn off all onscreen displays except for the onscreen markers (A 55).
• If you set an assignable button to [Markers] (A 111), you can press the button to turn the onscreen markers
on and off.
• If you selected [Side Crop] for the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [Resize Output] setting while
video is output from the MON. 1 terminal:
- The [1.85:1] aspect ratio marker will not be displayed.
- If you select [95%] for [Safety Zone Area], the markers on the left and right side will not be displayed.
Displaying Zebra Patterns
The camera has a zebra pattern feature that shows black and white
diagonal stripes over areas that are overexposed. The zebra patterns will
not affect your recordings. There are two types of zebra patterns and you
can display both simultaneously. Zebra 1 lets you identify areas within a
certain range (±5% of a specified level) while zebra 2 lets you identify
areas that are over a specified level. When you display both
simultaneously and they overlap, only zebra 1 will be displayed in those
areas.
1 Open the zebra pattern [Select] submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Select] (under [Zebra])
2 Select [Zebra 1], [Zebra 2] or [Zebra 1&2] and then press SET.
3 Open the zebra level submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Zebra 1 Level] or [Zebra 2 Level]
4 Select a zebra level and then press SET.
5 Press the ZEBRA button to activate the selected zebra pattern.
• Alternatively, before closing the menu, you can also select [Zebra],
select [On] and then press SET.
NOTES
• You can use the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [HD/SD Output] > [Zebra HD Output] setting to display the zebra
pattern on an external monitor connected to the HD/SD SDI terminal (HD output only), SYNC OUT terminal
(HD-Y signal output only) or HDMI OUT terminal (HD output only).
Center marker
Grid
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[Select]
(under [Zebra])
[Zebra 1]
Setting the Time Code
84
Setting the Time Code
While recording, the camera can generate a time code signal and embed it in your recordings. You can have the
camera output the time code signal from the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals, HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME
CODE terminal (A 91). In addition, you can superimpose the time code on video output from the HDMI OUT
terminal or SYNC OUT terminal. While playing back video recorded on a CF card, you can output the time code
on the CF card from the HD/SD SDI terminal or TIME CODE terminal. Additionally, you can superimpose the time
code on the picture from the HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal. For recordings with a frame rate of
29.97P, 59.94i or 59.94P, you can also select between a drop frame and non-drop frame time code.
To synchronize the camera’s time code to an external time code generator, refer to
Synchronizing with an
External Device
(A 88).
Selecting the Running Mode
During MXF mode, you can select the running mode of the camera’s time
code. During 4K and 2K modes, the running mode will be set to [Free
Run] during normal shooting and slow & fast recording mode; it will be set
to [Rec Run] during interval recording and frame recording modes. You
can set the time code’s initial value, however, by performing the procedure
in the following section
Setting the Time Code’s Initial Value
.
1 Open the time code [Mode] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Mode]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• If you selected [Regen.], you do not need to perform the rest of this
procedure. If you selected [Preset] and would like to set the time
code’s initial value, see the following section
Setting the Time Code’s
Initial Value
.
3 After you select [Preset], open the time code [Run] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Run]
4 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Options
Operating modes:
[Preset]: The time code starts from an initial value you can select in
advance. The default initial time code is 00:00:00.00. The time
code’s running mode depends on the [Run] setting.
[Rec Run]: The time code runs only while recording so clips
recorded consecutively on the same CF card will have
continuous time codes.
[Free Run]:The time code starts running the moment you press
SET to select this option and keeps running regardless
of the camera’s operation.
[Regen.]: The camera will read the selected CF card and the time code will
continue from the last recorded time code on the CF card. The
time code runs only while recording so clips recorded
consecutively on the same CF card will have continuous time
codes.
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[Mode]
[Preset]
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[Run]
[Free Run]
85
Setting the Time Code
Setting the Time Code’s Initial Value
If you set the time code mode to [Preset], you can set the initial value of
the time code.
1 Open the time code [Setting] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [Setting]
2 Select [Set] and then press SET.
• The time code setting screen appears with an orange selection frame
indicating the hours.
• To reset the time code to [00:00:00.00], select [Reset] instead. If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the
time code will be reset the moment you press SET and keep running continuously from 00:00:00.00.
3 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to set the hours and press SET to move to the minutes.
4 Change the rest of the fields (minutes, seconds, frame) in the same way.
• Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the time code.
5 Select [Set] and then press SET to close the screen.
• If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the time code will start running from the selected time code the
moment you press SET.
Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame
When [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)], [2K (2048/1920)] or
[MXF] > [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94P], [59.94i] or [29.97P], you can
select between a drop frame (DF) or non-drop frame (NDF) time code,
depending on how you plan to use your recordings.
When [Frame Rate] is set to any other setting, the time code is set to non-
drop frame (NDF) and cannot be changed.
1 Open the [DF/NDF] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [DF/NDF]
2 Select [DF] or [NDF] and then press SET.
• The time code display will differ depending on the setting. When you select [DF], the time code will appear
as [00:00:00.00]; when you select [NDF], it will appear as [00:00:00:00].
Putting the Time Code Display on Hold
If you set an assignable button to [Time Code Hold] (A 111), you can press the button to freeze the display of
the time code*. While the time code display is put on hold, [H] will appear on the screen next to the time code
and [HOLD] will appear on the rear panel.
The time code continues to run normally while the time code display is on hold. When you resume the time code
display, the current time code will be displayed.
* The time code display from the video output terminals will be put on hold. The time code data that is superimposed on the output
from the TIME CODE terminal, 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI terminal will not be put on hold.
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[Setting]
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[DF/NDF]
[DF]
Setting the Time Code
86
About the Time Code Display
An icon may appear next to the time code depending on the operation. Refer to the following table.
NOTES
• When the frame rate is 23.98P or 24.00P, the frames value in the time code runs from 0 to 23. When the frame
rate is 25.00P, 50.00i or 50.00P, it runs from 0 to 24. For other frame rates, it runs from 0 to 29.
• In 4K and 2K modes or when using pre-recording mode in MXF mode, [Free Run] is set automatically and
cannot be changed. When you are using interval recording, frame recording or slow & fast motion recording
mode, you cannot select the [Free Run] running mode.
• When you mix drop frame and non-drop frame time codes, there might be a discontinuity in the time code at
the point where the recording starts.
• As long as the built-in rechargeable lithium battery is charged and you selected the [Free Run] running mode,
the time code continues to run even if you disconnect all other power sources. However, this is less accurate
than when the camera is on.
• If you set an assignable button to [Time Code] (A 111), you can press the button to open the [¤ TC/UB
Setup] > [Time Code] submenu.
Icon Description
R The time code is set to [Regen.].
P The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Rec Run].
F The time code is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Free Run].
E Time code signal is coming from an external source.
H Time code display is on hold.
No icon Time code during clip playback.
87
Setting the User Bit
Setting the User Bit
The user bit display can be selected from the date or the time of
recording, or an identification code consisting of 8 characters in the
hexadecimal system. There are sixteen possible characters: the numbers
0 to 9 and the letters A to F.
If user bit information is being received along with an external time code,
you can also record the external user bit on the recording media. The user
bit information can be output from the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals
and HD/SD SDI terminals.
1 Open the user bit [Type] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Type]
2 Select the desired user bit type and press SET.
• Select [Setting] to set your own identification code, [Time] to use the time as user bit, or [Date] to use the
date as the user bit.
• If you selected [Time] or [Date], you do not need to perform the rest of the procedure. If you selected
[Setting], continue the procedure to set the identification code.
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.
• The user bit setting screen appears with an orange selection frame on the leftmost digit.
• To reset the user bit to [00 00 00 00], select [Reset] instead.
4 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to select the first character and press SET to move to the next
digit.
• Change the rest of the digits in the same way.
• Press the CANCEL button to close the screen without setting the user bit.
5 Select [Set] and then press SET to close the screen.
Operating modes:
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[User Bit]
[Type]
[Setting]
Synchronizing with an External Device
88
Synchronizing with an External Device
Using genlock synchronization, you can synchronize this camera’s video signal to that of an external video
device. Similarly, using an external time code signal, you can synchronize this camera’s time code to the external
signal. Using the external time code signal with multiple cameras allows you to set up a multi-camera recording.
You can also output the time code signal from this camera to achieve the same result. If you output the time
code (while shooting) from the 3G-SDI terminals or HD/SD SDI terminal* to an editing device, the editor can
create video with the same time code.
* The HD/SD SDI terminal can also output the time code during playback.
Connecting an External Device
When synchronizing the camera to an external signal, input a reference video signal* through the GENLOCK
terminal or output the camera’s signal as a reference signal for an external device through the SYNC OUT terminal.
When synchronizing a time code signal, use the TIME CODE terminal. Be sure to set the TIME CODE terminal to
input or output in advance.
Connect the external device to the camera as shown in the following diagram.
* For the reference video signal, you can use an analog blackburst or tri-level signal.
Connection Diagram
Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock Synchronization)
When a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal) is input through the GENLOCK terminal, the
phases of the camera’s V and H sync will automatically be synchronized to it. The phase difference between the
external Genlock signal and the camera is initially set to 0. The H phase can be adjusted within the range of
approximately ±0.4 H (HD equivalent).
1 Open the [Genlock Adjust.] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Genlock Adjust.]
2 Adjust the phase to the desired level, select [Set] and then press
SET.
• Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to select the value for each field
and press SET to move to the next field.
Operating modes:
SYNC OUT terminal
TIME CODE terminal
GENLOCK
synchronization
Time code
synchronization
GENLOCK terminal
[w Other Functions]
[Genlock Adjust.]
89
Synchronizing with an External Device
Time Code Signal Input
An external SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal received from the TIME
CODE terminal will be recorded as the time code. The user bit of the
external timing signal can also be recorded. Before connecting the device,
set the TIME CODE terminal to input. Also, you must set the running
mode of the time code to [Free Run] (A 84).
1 Open the [TC In/Out] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [TC In/Out]
2 Select [In] and then press SET.
Recording the User Bit of an External Signal
The user bit of an external time code signal can also be recorded with the
time code itself.
1 Open the user bit [Rec Mode] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Rec Mode]
2 Select [External] and then press SET.
NOTES
• The Genlock signal synchronization stabilizes after approximately 10 seconds. When the camera locks on an
external Genlock signal, U will appear on the upper right of the screen.
• If the external Genlock signal is incorrect or there is no input signal, the external time code that is recorded
may be incorrect.
• While a time code signal is being received, the external time code’s drop-frame bit will be used (if the external
time code is non-drop frame, [NDF] will appear on the rear panel).
• When an external time code signal is received, the camera’s own time code will be synchronized to it and the
synchronization will be maintained even if you disconnect the cable from the TIME CODE terminal. However,
performing any of the following actions while the cable is not connected will cause the synchronization to be
disrupted; the correct time code will be restored once you reconnect the cable.
- Turning the camera off/on
- Changing the operating mode to mode
- Changing the video configuration
• If the external time code signal is incorrect or there is no input signal, the internal time code set in the
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] submenu will be recorded instead.
• When the camera locks on an external time code signal, [EXT-LOCK] appears on the rear panel.
Operating modes:
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[TC In/Out]
[In]
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[User Bit]
[Rec Mode]
[Internal]
Synchronizing with an External Device
90
Reference Video Signal Output
You can output the camera’s video signal as a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal) through
the SYNC OUT terminal to synchronize an external device to this camera.
In mode, you must first set [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code]
> [24P TC/Sync] to [Normal], which is the default setting. In
mode or if the default setting has not been changed in mode, start
from step 3 below.
1 Open the [24P TC/Sync] submenu.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [24P TC/Sync]
2 Select [Normal] and then press SET.
3 Open the [Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in
mode) > [SYNC OUT] > [Output]
4 Select [HD Sync] (tri-level signal) or [Blk Burst]* (black burst) and
then press SET.
• If necessary, select [Normal] or [XF Legacy] with the [¤ TC/UB
Setup] > [Time Code] > [24P TC/Sync] setting.
• If necessary, adjust the scan mode with the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
> [SYNC OUT] > [Scan Mode] setting.
* Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
Synchronization signal summary
*HRAW only.
Operating modes:
Video configuration for recording SYNC OUT terminal
System
priority
Recording
mode
Resolution Frame rate
HD Sync
1
Blk Burst
Normal
2
XF Legacy
4K
RAW
4096×2160
3840×2160
59.94P
1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
1080/59.94i 480/59.94i29.97P
23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)
50.00P
1080/25.00 (P/PsF) 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P
24.00P 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) 1080/60.00i –
HRAW
4K1K RAW
4096×1080
3840×1080*
59.94P 720/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P 720/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
2K
12-bit
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
1080/59.94i 480/59.94i29.97P
23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)
50.00P
1080/25.00 (P/PsF) 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P
24.00P 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) 1080/60.00i –
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P 720/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P 720/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
mode
[¤ TC/UB Setup]
[Time Code]
[24P TC/Sync]
[Normal]
mode:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
mode:
[¢ Video Setup]
[SYNC OUT]
[Output]
[Composite]
91
Synchronizing with an External Device
1
You can use the [¤ TC/UB Setup ] > [Time Code] > [24P TC/Sync] setting to select [Normal] or [XF Legacy].
2
You can switch between the P and PsF setting for output.
Time Code Signal Output
The time code will be output from the TIME CODE terminal as an SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal. The user
bit will also be output. Before connecting the device, set [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [TC In/Out] to
[Out] to change the TIME CODE terminal to output (A 89). The embedded time code will be output from the
3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI terminal.
NOTES
• The user bit of the time code signal is output while the camera is recording in mode or during playback
of a clip recorded on a CF card in mode. For the HD/SD SDI terminal, when the frame rate is set to
[23.98P] and the [¤ TC/UB Setup] > [User Bit] > [Output Mode] setting is set to [Pulldown], the user bit
will be 2:3 pulldown data. In other words, when a 23.98P recording is output from the HD/SD SDI terminal, the
signal is converted to 59.94i using the 2:3 pulldown method. An external device can receive the data used in
this conversion (2:3 pulldown data) to convert the signal to the original 23.98P specifications.
Video configuration SYNC OUT terminal
System priority Resolution Frame rate
HD Sync
1
Blk Burst mode
mode
Normal
2
XF Legacy
MXF
1920×1080
59.94i 1080/59.94i
1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i29.97P 1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)
50.00i 1080/50.00i
1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P 1080/25.00 (P/PsF)
24.00P 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) 1080/60.00i 1080/60.00i –
1280×720
59.94P 720/59.94P
720/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i29.97P 720/29.97P
23.98P 720/23.98P
50.00P 720/50.00P
720/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
25.00P 720/25.00P
24.00P 720/24.00P 720/60.00P 720/60.00P –
Operating modes:
Recording Audio
92
Recording Audio
The camera features two-channel linear PCM audio recording and playback with a sampling frequency of
48 kHz. You can record audio using commercially available microphones (XLR terminal, MIC terminal) or line
input (XLR terminal). You can select the audio input independently for channel 1 and channel 2.
An audio signal will be output with the video signal from the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI
terminal. When you use an external recorder, the audio signal will also be recorded.
Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camera
In order to use the XLR terminals, the monitor unit must be attached to the camera. The monitor unit features
two XLR terminals (CH1/CH2) that can be used to record audio independently to the two audio channels.
In addition to XLR microphones, you can also connect to the camera’s MIC terminal commercially available
condenser microphones with their own power supply and a ∅ 3.5 mm mini-stereo plug*. If the monitor unit is
attached to the camera, you can use the microphone holder on the monitor unit.
* For 50.00 Hz recordings, use commercially available microphones with a cable no longer than 3 m.
Follow the procedure below to attach a microphone (refer also to the following illustration). To connect an
external device to the camera, plug the device’s cable into the camera’s XLR terminal (햵).
1 Loosen the microphone lock screw (햲), open the microphone holder and insert the microphone (햳).
2 Tighten the lock screw and put the microphone cable through the microphone cable clamp under
the microphone holder (햴).
3 Plug the microphone cable into the desired XLR terminal (햵) or the MIC terminal (햶).
NOTES
• Be careful not to pass the microphone cable in front of the cooling fan’s air vents. Failure to do so may cause
audio noise to be recorded.
Operating modes:
Microphone
lock screw
MIC terminal
Cable clamp
XLR terminals
93
Recording Audio
Selecting the Audio Input from the XLR Terminals
Using the XLR terminals CH1 and CH2, you can record audio independently to the two audio channels from a
microphone or analog audio input source. Note that the camera’s MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR
terminals. To record audio from the XLR terminals, be sure not to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal.
Switching Between Microphone and Line Input
Set the XLR terminal switch of the desired channel to LINE or MIC.
• To supply a microphone with phantom power, set the switch to
MIC+48V instead. Make sure to connect the microphone first, before
turning the phantom power on. Keep the microphone connected
when turning off the phantom power.
• When using the XLR terminal to record to only one channel, use the
CH1 terminal.
Selecting the Recording Channel
You can select to which channel the camera will record audio.
1 Open the [XLR Rec Channel] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR Rec Channel]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Options
IMPORTANT
• When connecting a microphone or device that does not support phantom power, make sure to set the XLR
terminal switch to MIC or LINE, respectively. If you set the switch to MIC+48V, the microphone or device may
be damaged.
[CH1]: Records audio to each channel separately. Audio input
into CH1 is recorded to channel 1, while audio input into
CH2 is recorded to channel 2.
[CH1/CH2]: Audio input into CH1 is recorded to both channels. Audio
input into CH2 will not be recorded.
CH1/CH2
ã
switches
XLR
terminal
switches
CH1/CH2
ã
dials
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[XLR Rec Channel]
[CH1]
Recording Audio
94
Adjusting the Audio Level from the XLR Terminals
You can set the audio recording level for audio input from the XLR terminals to auto or manual for each channel.
Automatic Audio Level Adjustment
Set the ã switch of the desired channel to A (automatic) to let
the camera automatically adjust that channel’s audio level.
NOTES
• When both CH1 and CH2 are set to the same audio input (external
microphone or external line input), if the audio level is set to automatic,
you can use the [¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR ALC Link]
setting to link the audio level adjustment of both channels.
Manual Audio Level Adjustment
You can set the audio level for each channel manually from -G to 18 dB.
1Set the ã switch of the desired channel to M.
2 Turn the corresponding ã dial to adjust the audio level.
• For reference, the 0 corresponds to -G, 5 corresponds to 0 dB,
and 10 corresponds to +18 dB.
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level
meter on the screen or rear panel will go to the right of the 18 dB
mark (one mark right of the 20 dB mark) only occasionally.
• Closing the protective cover for XLR audio controls will prevent the
audio controls from being changed inadvertently.
NOTES
• If at least one of the channels is set to manual audio level adjustment, you can also activate the audio peak
limiter to prevent audio distortions. When activated, the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input
signals when they exceed -4 dBFS. Use the [¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [Limiter] setting.
• We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level. If the input level is too high, audio may
become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level.
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Level] (A 111), you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio
level indicator on and off.
CH1/CH2
ã
switches
CH1/CH2
ã
switches
CH1/CH2
ã
dials
95
Recording Audio
Adjusting the Microphone’s Sensitivity
You can adjust the microphone’s sensitivity if the XLR terminal switch is
set to MIC or MIC+48V.
1 Open the desired XLR terminal’s sensitivity submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR1 Mic Trimming] or [XLR2
Mic Trimming]
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.
Available Sensitivity Levels
Activating the Microphone’s Attenuator
You can activate the microphone’s attenuator (20 dB) if the XLR terminal
switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V.
1 Open the desired XLR terminal’s microphone attenuator submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [XLR1 Mic Att.] or
[XLR2 Mic Att.]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
Adjusting the Audio Level from the MIC Terminal
You can adjust the audio recording level of a microphone attached to the
MIC terminal to auto or manual. You can set the audio level manually
within a range of 0 to 99.
1 Open the [MIC Mode] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Mode]
2 Select [Automatic] or [Manual] and then press SET.
• If you selected [Automatic], you do not need to perform the rest of the
procedure. If you selected [Manual], continue the procedure to set the
microphone’s audio recording level.
3 Open the [MIC Level] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Level]
4 Use the joystick (Ý) or SELECT dial to set the audio recording
level and then press SET.
• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level
meter on the screen or rear panel will go to the right of the 18 dB
mark (one mark right of the 20 dB mark) only occasionally.
NOTES
• When adjusting the audio level manually, you can activate the audio peak limiter with the [¡ Audio Setup] >
[Audio Input] > [Limiter] setting. When activated, the audio peak limiter will limit the amplitude of audio input
signals when they exceed -6 dBFS.
• We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level. If the input level is too high, audio may
become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level.
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Level] (A 111), you can press the button to turn the onscreen audio
level indicator on and off.
+12 dB +6 dB 0 dB -6 dB -12 dB
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[XLR1 Mic Trimming]
[XLR2 Mic Trimming]
[0 dB]
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[XLR1 Mic Att.]
[XLR2 Mic Att.]
[Off]
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[MIC Mode]
[Automatic]
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[MIC Level]
[50]
Recording Audio
96
Activating the Microphone’s Attenuator
If the audio level is too high and the sound sounds distorted, activate the
microphone attenuator (20 dB).
1 Open the [MIC Att.] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Att.]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
Monitoring the Audio with Headphones
Connect headphones* to the × (headphone) terminal to monitor the
recorded audio. You can adjust the headphone volume with the
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Headphone Volume] setting.
* For 50.00 Hz recordings, use commercially available headphones with a cable no
longer than 3 m.
Selecting the Audio Channel
You can select the audio channel that is output from the ×
(headphone) terminal.
1 Open the [Channel] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Channel]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Options
NOTES
• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Output CH] (A 111), you can press the button to change the audio
channel directly.
Operating modes:
[CH1/CH2]: Audio from CH1 is output from the left audio channel and
audio from CH2 is output from the right audio channel.
[CH1/CH1]: Audio from CH1 is output from both the left and right audio
channels.
[CH2/CH2]: Audio from CH2 is output from both the left and right audio
channels.
[All/All]: Audio from CH1 and CH2 is mixed and output from both
the left and right audio channels.
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[MIC Att.]
[Off]
× (headphone)
terminal
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Output]
[Channel]
[CH1/CH2]
97
Using Metadata
Using Metadata
The camera automatically adds metadata to MXF clips, which are recorded on a CF card. You can use the
Canon XF Utility software to check and search for specific metadata. You can also create and transfer a user
memo remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application (A 50).
Metadata Components
1
User memo files need to be created using the software and saved on the SD card in advance.
2
Can only be added to clips already recorded.
3
Recording data is logged automatically by the camera.
Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF Utility
Before you can add a user memo, you must first install the Canon XF Utility software (A 154). Next, create the
user memo and then save it to an SD card. Once you insert the SD card in the camera and select the user
memo, it will be added to clips you record.
For details on using the software, refer to the instruction manual that is installed with the Canon XF Utility
software (A 156).
1Use Canon XF Utility to save a user memo to an SD card.
• For details, refer to
Managing User Memo Profiles
in the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual.
2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the camera.
3 Open the metadata [Setting] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting]
4 Select [SD Card] and then press SET.
5 Open the [User Memo] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Metadata] > [User Memo]
6 Select the file name of the desired user memo and then press SET.
•The Q icon appears on the right of the screen.
• Select [Off] to record clips without a user memo.
NOTES
• After you set a user memo, do not remove the SD card while you are
recording. If the SD card is removed, the user memo will not be added
to the clip.
• You must set the user memo before you start recording for it to be
added to the clip. You cannot change the user memo already added to a
clip using the camera but you can do so with the Canon XF Utility
software.
Metadata
Entering content Checking content
Camera Canon XF Utility Wi-Fi Remote Canon XF Utility
User Memo: clip title, creator, location and description. – Ü
1
Ü Ü
GPS information: altitude, latitude and longitude. – Ü
2
Ü Ü
Recording data: Shutter speed, ISO speed/gain value, etc. –
3
– – Ü
Unique Material Identifiers (UMID): country, organization
and user codes based on the SMPTE standard.
Ü
(A 170)
– – –
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Metadata]
[Setting]
[SD Card]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Metadata]
[User Memo]
Using Metadata
98
Setting a User Memo Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you create a user memo profile and transfer it to the
camera from a Wi-Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application. Using the Wi-Fi Remote application
you have two additional advantages over user memos created with Canon XF Utility: you can change the user
memo of the last clip recorded, even if you did not specify a user memo in advance; and you can enter manually
the GPS information of your shooting location.
1 Press the [Metadata Input] tab on the Wi-Fi Remote screen.
2Press [— Activate].
• Alternatively, on the camera, you can set [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting] to [Remote].
3 Fill the necessary user memo and GPS information fields.
• You can press [Clear] to clear the information entered into each field.
4 Press one of the transfer options to transfer the metadata to the camera.
• [Metadata correctly transferred] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the metadata will be
transferred and applied to the clips on the camera.
5Press ^ to close the message.
Options
NOTES
• The metadata sent to the camera from Wi-Fi Remote will be lost in the following cases.
- If the camera was turned off.
- If the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting] setting was changed.
• Metadata sent to the camera from Wi-Fi Remote will not be added to relay clips recorded before the switch to
the current CF card.
[Apply from Next]: Adds the metadata you set in Wi-Fi Remote to all clips recorded after the transfer.
[Overwrite Prev.]: Only available after recording a clip. Adds the metadata you set in Wi-Fi Remote to all clips recorded
after the transfer and also to the last clip recorded (overwriting any user memo that may have been
recorded previously with the clip).
[Overwrite]: Only available while recording a clip. Adds the metadata you set in Wi-Fi Remote to the clip that is
being recorded (overwriting any previous user memo). It will also add this metadata to all clips
recorded after the transfer.
99
Color Bars/Audio Reference Signal
Color Bars/Audio Reference Signal
You can have the camera generate and record color bars and/or a 1 kHz audio reference signal and output them
from the 3G-SDI terminals
1
, MON. terminals
1
, HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal, SYNC OUT terminal
2
and × (headphone) terminal
1
.
1
Outputs audio reference signal only.
2
Outputs color bars only.
Recording Color Bars
You can choose between SMPTE standard-definition color bars, EBU
color bars and ARIB multi-format HDTV color bars.
1 Open the color bars [Type] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Type]
2 Select the type of color bars and then press SET.
3 Open the [Enable] submenu to activate the color bars.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Bars] > [Enable]
4 Select [On] and then press SET.
• The selected color bars appear on the screen and will be recorded
when you press the START/STOP button.
• Turning the camera off or changing the operating mode to
mode will deactivate the color bars.
• Alternatively, if you set an assignable button to [Color Bars] (A 111),
you can press the button to activate the color bars.
Recording an Audio Reference Signal
The camera can output a 1 kHz audio reference signal with the color bars.
1 Open the [1 kHz Tone] submenu.
[¡ Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [1 kHz Tone]
2 Select the desired level and then press SET.
• Available levels are -12 dB, -18 dB and -20 dB.
• Select [Off] to turn off the signal.
• The signal is output at the selected level and will be recorded when
you press the START/STOP button.
Operating modes:
[~ Camera Setup]
[Color Bars]
[Type]
[SMPTE] or [EBU]*
* Depending on the country/region
of purchase.
[~ Camera Setup]
[Color Bars]
[Enable]
[Off]
[¡ Audio Setup]
[Audio Input]
[1 kHz Tone]
[Off]
Video Scopes
100
Video Scopes
The camera can display a simplified waveform monitor or vectorscope. It can also display an edge monitor* to
help you focus. The video scopes appear only on the LCD screen. They do not appear in the viewfinder or on an
external monitor. In order to use the video scopes, the monitor unit must be attached to the camera.
* The edge monitor looks at the focus of the entire picture and displays the results as a waveform. The edge monitor is available
only in mode.
Displaying a Video Scope
Press the WFM button (waveform monitor or vectorscope) or EDGE
MON. button (edge monitor).
• The waveform monitor will appear in a window on the lower right of the
screen.
• You can repeatedly press the WFM button to activate the video scopes
in the following sequence.
Waveform monitor Vectorscope Off
• Alternatively, you can display the video scopes using [wOther
Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Setting]. Select [WFM] for the waveform monitor, [VS] for the vectorscope or
[Edge Mon.] for the edge monitor.
Configuring the Waveform Monitor
The camera’s waveform monitor function offers 5 modes. You can also
change the gain.
1 Open the [Waveform Monitor] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Waveform Monitor]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform
steps 3 and 4.
3 Open the waveform monitor [Gain] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Waveform Monitor])
4 Select [1x] or [2x] and then press SET.
Options
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
[Line]: Sets the waveform monitor to line display mode.
[Line+Spot]: The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Line] mode waveform.
[Field]: Sets the waveform monitor to field display mode.
[RGB]: Functions like an RGB parade scope.
[YPbPr]: Functions like a YPbPr parade scope.
[wOther Functions]
[WFM (LCD)]
[Waveform Monitor]
[Line]
101
Video Scopes
Configuring the Vectorscope
The camera’s vectorscope function offers 2 modes. You can also change
the gain.
1 Open the [Vectorscope] submenu.
[wOther Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Vectorscope]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform
steps 3 and 4.
3 Open the vectorscope [Gain] submenu.
[wOther Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Vectorscope])
4 Select [1x] or [5x] and then press SET.
Options
Configuring the Edge Monitor
Using this video scope allows you to focus with more precision. You can
use the edge monitor along with the other focus assistance functions
(A 80). The edge monitor features 2 modes.
1 Open the [Edge Monitor] submenu.
[wOther Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Edge Monitor]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• If you do not need to change the gain, you do not need to perform steps 3 and 4.
3 Open the edge monitor [Gain] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [WFM (LCD)] > [Gain] (under [Edge Monitor])
4 Select the desired gain value and then press SET.
Options
Operating modes:
[Spot]: The color signal of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Normal] mode waveform.
[Normal]: Displays the vectorscope.
Operating modes:
[Type 1]: The waveform that represents the focus of the entire picture is displayed in green. In addition, the waveform
of the area in the three red frames is displayed in red on top of the previous waveform.
[Type 2]: This mode displays the edge monitor with the waveform monitor in [Line+Spot] mode. The waveform
monitor appears on the left in green while the edge monitor appears on the right in blue. The waveform of
the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the edge monitor waveform.
[w Other Functions]
[WFM (LCD)]
[Vectorscope]
[Normal]
[w Other Functions]
[WFM (LCD)]
[Edge Monitor]
[Type 1]
Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips
102
Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips
When recording on a CF card, you can flag an important shot in a clip by adding a “shot mark” (!). There are
two types of shot marks, shot mark 1 (") and shot mark 2 (#), and you can add either or both types to a single
clip. You can also add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the entire clip to flag clips you want to set apart.
You can add all four types of marks remotely using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
When the camera is in mode, you can add or delete shot marks (A138). You can also display an index
screen of all the shot marks (A137), allowing you to find a particular scene in a clip more quickly.
Adding Shot Marks while Recording
To add a shot mark to a clip while recording, you must first set in advance an assignable button to [Add Shot
Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2].
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 111).
• To add both shot marks, set one assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] and another assignable button to
[Add Shot Mark 2].
2 While you are recording, press the assignable button at the beginning of the shot you wish to mark.
• A message indicating the short mark will appear and the selected shot mark will be added to the current
frame of the clip.
• You can press the button again to add another shot mark. Up to 100 shot marks (" and # marks
combined) can be added to a single clip.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can set a shot mark (" or #) remotely from a Wi-Fi-
enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 While recording a clip, press [SHOT MARK1] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen to set a shot mark 1 or
[SHOT MARK2] to set a shot mark 2.
• [Shot Mark1] or [Shot Mark2] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the shot mark will be applied
to the clip.
2Press ^ to close the message.
Operating modes:
103
Adding Marks while Recording MXF Clips
NOTES
• There may be up to a 0.5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camera adds the shot
mark. When using the Wi-Fi Remote application, the delay may be longer depending on the conditions of the
wireless signal.
• When you are using interval recording or frame recording mode, you cannot add shot marks to a clip.
• When a clip contains either shot mark, ! will appear next to the clip’s thumbnail in the playback index screen.
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last Clip Recorded
After recording an important clip, you can add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the clip to flag it and set it
apart. When the camera is in mode, you can display an index screen that contains only clips with an $
mark or only clips with a % mark (A 128). Furthermore, you can use the $ mark to protect important clips, as
clips with an $ mark cannot be deleted.
To add an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded in mode, you must first set in advance an
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark].
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A111).
• To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another
assignable button to [Add % Mark].
2 After recording a clip, press the assignable button.
• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.
Remote Operation Using Wi-Fi Remote
After completing the necessary preparations (A 50) you can set an $ mark or a % mark remotely from a
Wi-Fi-enabled device using the Wi-Fi Remote application.
1 After recording a clip, press [$ MARK] on the Wi-Fi Remote screen to set a an $ mark or
[% MARK] to set a % mark.
• [OK Mark] or [Check Mark] will be displayed on the Wi-Fi Remote screen and the mark will be applied to the
clip.
2 Press ^ to close the message.
NOTES
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and a % mark at the same time.
Reviewing an MXF Clip
104
Reviewing an MXF Clip
When the camera is in mode, you can review the last clip that was
recorded on a CF card.
1 Open the [Rec Review] submenu to set the review length.
[w Other Functions] > [Rec Review]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
3 After you finish recording, press the
u button.
• The last clip that was recorded is played back without audio for the
selected duration. [ÐREVIEW] appears at the top of the screen.
• Press the CANCEL button to stop reviewing the clip and change the
camera back to record pause mode.
• After the clip finishes playing back, the camera returns to record pause
mode.
Options
NOTES
• When you are using a special recording mode (A105), you cannot review a clip.
• If the camera switched CF cards during a recording, the camera will play back the clip on the CF card most
recently recorded on.
Operating modes:
[Entire Clip]: Allows you to review the entire clip.
[Last 4 sec]: Allows you to review just the last 4 seconds of the clip.
[wOther Functions]
[Rec Review]
[Entire Clip]
105
Special Recording Modes
Special Recording Modes
The camera features 4 special recording modes.
Interval recording ([Interval Rec]): A pre-defined number of frames at a pre-defined interval will be recorded
automatically. This mode is suitable for recording subjects with little movement, such as natural surroundings or
plants.
Frame recording ([Frame Rec]): A pre-defined number of frames will be recorded every time you press the
START/STOP button. This mode is suitable for recording stop motion animation.
Slow & fast motion recording ([Slow & Fast Motion]): This mode allows you to change the shooting frame rate to
achieve a slow motion or fast motion effect during playback.
Pre-recording ([Pre Rec]): The camera will start recording approximately 3 seconds before you press the START/
STOP button. This is especially useful when it is difficult to predict when to start recording. Pre-recording is
available only in MXF mode.
Interval Recording Mode
Set the interval and number of frames in advance. Sound is not recorded
in this mode. During 4K and 2K modes, MXF clips will not be recorded
simultaneously on a CF card even if a card is inserted in the camera.
Configuring Interval Recording Mode
1 Open the [Interval] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Interval Rec] > [Interval]
2 Select the desired interval and then press SET.
• See the following table for the available intervals.
3 Select [Rec Frames], select the desired number of frames and then
press SET.
Available Intervals
Number of Frames Recorded
Operating modes:
1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec 5 sec 6 sec 7 sec 8 sec 9 sec
10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 50 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min
4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min 10 min
System priority Frame rate Frames recorded
4K
Any
1, 3, 6, 92K
MXF
59.94i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 24.00P
59.94P, 50.00i, 50.00P, 25.00P 2, 6, 12
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Interval Rec]
[Interval]
[1 sec]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Interval Rec]
[Rec Frames]
[1]
Special Recording Modes
106
Activating Interval Recording Mode and Recording
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Special Rec]
2 Select [Interval Rec] and then press SET.
•[INT STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [INT STBY] (during MXF
mode) appears at the top of the screen (with [INT] flashing).
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.
• The set number of frames are recorded automatically at the set interval.
• The tally lamp illuminates.
• [INT] changes to [ÜINT] while recording frames.
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
• All of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.
•[INT STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [INT STBY] (during MXF mode) appears at the top of the screen
(with [INT] flashing).
• The tally lamp goes out.
NOTES
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.
• While recording, you cannot change the interval or number of frames.
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.
• Interval recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be
deactivated also if you change the video configuration.
• During this special recording mode, the running mode of the time code (A 84) can be set to [Rec Run] or
[Regen.]*. The time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the running mode of the time code
(A 84) is set to [Free Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to
[Rec Run] during special recording mode. When special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will
return to its previous setting.
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the MON. terminals, TIME CODE
terminal or HD/SD SDI terminal. During 4K and 2K modes, the time code signal will be output from the 3G-SDI
terminals.
* During MXF mode only.
Frame Recording Mode
Set the number of frames in advance. We recommend operating the camera remotely or stabilizing the camera,
for example, on a tripod. Sound is not recorded in this mode. During 4K and 2K modes, MXF clips will not be
recorded simultaneously on a CF card even if a card is inserted in the camera.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[
Special Rec]
[Off]
107
Special Recording Modes
Configuring Frame Recording Mode
1 Open the [Rec Frames] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Frame Rec] > [Rec Frames]
2 Select the desired number of frames and then press SET.
Number of Frames Recorded
Activating Frame Recording Mode and Recording
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Special Rec]
2 Select [Frame Rec] and then press SET.
•[FRM STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [FRM STBY] (during
MXF mode) appears at the top of the screen (with [FRM] flashing).
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.
• The set number of frames are recorded automatically.
• The tally lamp illuminates.
• [FRM] changes to [ÜFRM].
• Repeat until you finish recording.
4 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Special Rec]
5 Select [Off] and then press SET.
• Frame recording mode ends and all of the recorded frames are joined together into one clip.
•[STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [STBY] (during MXF mode) appears at the top of the screen.
• The tally lamp goes out.
NOTES
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.
• While recording, you cannot change the number of frames.
• Some frames at the point the recording was stopped may be recorded and added to the end of the clip.
• Frame recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be
deactivated also if you change the video configuration.
• During this special recording mode, the running mode of the time code (A84) can be set to [Rec Run] or
[Regen.]*. The time code advances by the number of frames recorded. If the running mode of the time code
(A84) is set to [Free Run] or the time code is input from an external source, the running mode will switch to
[Rec Run] during special recording mode. When special recording mode is deactivated, the running mode will
return to its previous setting.
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the MON. terminals, TIME CODE terminal
or HD/SD SDI terminal. During 4K and 2K modes, the time code signal will be output from the 3G-SDI terminals.
* During MXF mode only.
System priority Frame rate Frames recorded
4K
Any
1, 3, 6, 92K
MXF
59.94i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 24.00P
59.94P, 50.00i, 50.00P, 25.00P 2, 6, 12
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Frame Rec]
[Rec Frames]
[1]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Special Rec]
[Off]
Special Recording Modes
108
Slow & Fast Motion Mode
When you set the the frame rate to a progressive frame rate (A 60), the camera can record with a frame rate
(shooting frame rate) that is different from the playback frame rate. Recording a clip at a higher frame rate than
the [Frame Rate] setting will result in a slow motion effect during playback (up to 1/2.5 of the original speed).
Conversely, a lower frame rate will result in a fast motion effect (up to 60x the original speed). Sound is not
recorded in this mode. During 4K and 2K modes, MXF clips will not be recorded simultaneously on a CF card
even if a card is inserted in the camera.
Configuring Slow & Fast Motion Mode
1 Open the [S&F Frame Rate] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [S&F Frame Rate]
2 Select the desired shooting frame rate and then press SET.
• Available shooting frame rates depend on other video configuration
settings in use.
Available Shooting Frame Rates
1
The recording mode cannot be set to [HRAW], [4K1K RAW] or [YCC422] for this system frequency.
2
This range is in 2 fps increments. When the shooting frame rate appears in brackets on the screen, this indicates that both
3G-SDI terminals are required for output.
Activating Slow & Fast Motion Mode and Recording
1 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Special Rec]
2 Select [Slow & Fast Motion] and then press SET.
• [S&F STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [S&F STBY] (during MXF
mode) appears at the top of the screen.
• The selected shooting frame rate appears on the right of the screen
next to the frame rate setting (the playback frame rate).
Operating modes:
System priority
Video configuration
Shooting frame rate
(fps, in 1 fps unless otherwise noted)
System
frequency
Recording mode/
Vertical resolution
4K
2K
59.94 Hz
24.00 Hz
1
RAW
12-bit
10-bit
1 to 30
32 to 60 (in 2 fps increments)
2
4K1K RAW
HRAW
1 to 60
62 to 120 (in 2 fps increments)
2
50.00 Hz
RAW
12-bit
10-bit
1 to 25
26 to 50 (in 2 fps increments)
2
4K1K RAW
HRAW
1 to 50
52 to 100 (in 2 fps increments)
2
MXF
59.94 Hz
24.00 Hz
1080 1 to 30
720 1 to 60
50.00 Hz
1080 1 to 25
720 1 to 50
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[S&F Frame Rate]
[24]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[Special Rec]
[Off]
109
Special Recording Modes
3 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.
• The tally lamp illuminates.
• [S&F] changes to [Ü S&F] while recording.
4 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
• A clip is recorded at the set frame rate.
• [S&F STBY`] (during 4K and 2K modes) or [S&F STBY] (during MXF mode) appears at the top of the
screen.
• The tally lamp goes out.
Setting the Shooting Frame Rate from the Shooting Screen
If you set an assignable button to [S&F Frame Rate], you can conveniently set the shooting frame rate from the
shooting screen without having to go through the menus.
1 Set an assignable button to [S&F Frame Rate] (A 111).
2 Press the assignable button.
• The shooting frame rate will be highlighted in orange.
3 Push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to select the desired frame rate.
4 Press SET.
• The display of the shooting frame rate will return to normal.
NOTES
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time. In addition, slow & fast motion mode cannot be used
with double slot recording.
• While recording, you cannot change the shooting frame rate.
• For lower shooting frame rates, it may take approximately 1 second to stop recording.
• During special recording mode, the time code signal will not be output from the MON. terminals, TIME CODE
terminal or HD/SD SDI terminal. During 4K and 2K modes, the time code signal will be output from the 3G-SDI
terminals.
• Slow & fast motion mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be
deactivated also if you change the video configuration.
• When the bit rate in the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MXF] > [Bit Rate/Resolution] setting is set to [50 Mbps
1920x1080] or [50 Mbps 1280x720], relay recording is not available during slow motion recording.
• During 4K and 2K modes, the running mode of the time code (A 84) is set to [Free Run] and cannot be
changed. During MXF mode, the running mode is set to [Regen.]. The time code advances while video is
recorded. If the running mode of the time code is set to [Free Run] or the time code is input from an external
source, the running mode will switch to [Rec Run] during special recording mode. When special recording
mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its previous setting.
Shooting frame rate
Playback frame rate
Special Recording Modes
110
Pre-recording Mode
When pre-recording mode is activated, the camera starts recording
continuously into a temporary memory of approximately 3 seconds so
when you press the START/STOP button, the clip will contain also
approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before you pressed
the button.
1 Set the system priority to MXF (A 64).
2 Open the [Special Rec] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Special Rec]
3 Select [Pre Rec] and then press SET.
• [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.
4 Press the START/STOP button to begin recording.
• The tally lamp illuminates.
• [PRE REC STBY] changes to [Ü PRE REC] while recording.
5 Press the START/STOP button again to stop recording.
• The camera records the clip, including approximately 3 seconds of video and audio recorded before the
START/STOP button was pressed.
• The tally lamp goes out and [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.
NOTES
• You can use only one special recording mode at a time.
• Pre-recording mode will be deactivated if the special recording mode is changed or turned off. It will be
deactivated also if you change the video configuration.
• During pre-recording mode, the time code will be recorded with the running mode (A 84) set to [Free Run],
regardless of the previous setting. Alternatively, you can use an external time code signal. When the time code
is recorded, it will include the 3 seconds before the START/STOP button was pressed. When special recording
mode is deactivated, the running mode will return to its previous setting.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[
Special Rec]
[Off]
4
111
Customization
Assignable Buttons
The camera allows you to assign various functions to 15 buttons*. By assigning often-used functions, you can
quickly access them with a single press of a button. Some assignable buttons are located on the monitor unit so
their availability depends on the camera configuration used.
* In mode, only assignable buttons 1 to 9 are available.
Changing the Assigned Function
1 Open the [Assign Button] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Assign Button]
2 Select the button to change and then press SET.
• A list of available functions appears.
• The quick reference to the right shows the default settings for each
assignable button. Also, the label on the camera for assignable
buttons 1 to 9 indicates the default setting*. By default, buttons 10 to
15 have no assignable function set.
* Assignable button 7 is usable only when you attach the grip unit of the C300 /
C300 PL or C100.
3 Select the desired function and then press SET.
• If you selected [User Setting (NONE)], the menu will change from
orange to blue to indicate you are selecting a menu setting to register.
Continue the procedure to register a menu setting. Otherwise, you do
not need to perform the rest of the procedure.
4 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to register and then press SET.
• The selected menu setting will be registered to the customizable slot and to the assignable button.
• The name of the selected menu setting will be listed instead of [User Setting (NONE)] and the customizable
slot will be marked by a ¥.
Operating modes:
[w Other Functions]
[Assign Button]
[1 MAGN.]
[2 PEAKING]
[3 ZEBRA]
[4 WFM]
[5 LENS EXCHANGE]
[6 LUT]
[7 MAGN.]
[8 WFM]
[9 EDGE MON.]
[10-15 (NONE)]
Assignable Buttons
112
NOTES
• You can check the two [Assign Button] status screens (A 180) to see what functions are set for the
assignable buttons.
• You can reset only the functions assigned to the assignable buttons, without affecting other camera settings,
with the [w Other Functions] >[Reset] > [Assignable Buttons] function. All the assignable buttons will return
to their default function.
Using an Assignable Button
After you assign a function to one of the buttons, press the button to activate the function. For some functions,
an options menu may appear. In such case, select the desired option and then press SET.
Assignable Functions
Functions can be set separately in mode and mode. Refer to the following table for assignable
functions and available modes.
Function name Description A
[ND +] Cycles through the ND filter settings in order (progressively darker). Ü – 73
[ND -] Cycles through the ND filter settings in reverse order (progressively brighter). Ü – 73
[PEAKING] Turns peaking on/off. Ü – 80
[ZEBRA] Turns zebra patterns on/off. Ü – 83
[WFM]
Activates video scopes in the following sequence:
Waveform monitor J Vectorscope J Off
Ü Ü 100
[EDGE MON.] Turns the edge monitor on/off. Ü – 100
[MAGN.] Turns magnification on/off. Ü – 80
[Color Bars] Turns color bars on/off. Ü – 99
[Markers] Turns onscreen markers on/off. Ü – 82
[LCD Setup] Opens the [LCD Setup] submenu. Ü Ü 38
[VF Setup] Opens the [VF Setup] submenu. Ü Ü 38
[LCD/VF B&W] Turns the B&W mode of the LCD and viewfinder on/off. Ü Ü 38
[View Assist.] Turns view assistance on/off. Ü – 58
[LUT] Turns the LUT from the MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI terminals on/off. Ü – 148
[Resize MON.
Output]
Switches the resizing method of the MON. 1 terminal output in the following sequence:
Letterbox J Squeeze J Side Crop
Ü – 147
[Resize MXF
Output]
Switches the resizing method of MXF clips in the following sequence:
Letterbox J Squeeze J Side Crop
Ü – 63
[Onscreen Display]
Turns on/off the inclusion of onscreen displays on video output from the HD/SD SDI
terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal (both HD and SD video output).
Ü Ü 151
[Add Shot Mark 1] Adds an " mark to the clip. Ü Ü 102
[Add Shot Mark 2] Adds an # mark to the clip. Ü Ü 102
[Add $ Mark] Adds an $ mark to the clip. Ü Ü 134
[Add % Mark] Adds a % mark to the clip. Ü Ü 134
[Time Code] Displays the [Time Code] submenu. Ü – 84
[Time Code Hold]* Puts the time code display on hold or resumes it. Ü Ü 85
[Headphone +] Increases the headphone volume. Ü Ü 131
[Headphone -] Reduces the headphone volume. Ü Ü 131
[Audio Output CH] Switches the audio channel for audio output from the × terminal. Ü Ü 131
[Audio Level] Turns the audio level meter on/off. Ü Ü 94, 95
113
Assignable Buttons
* Function can be used only by assigning it to a button.
[Photo]* Records a photo. Ü Ü 159
[FUNC.] Enters the direct setting mode, replicating the function of the camera’s FUNC. button. Ü – 66
[FUNC. Shutter]
Enters the direct setting mode with the shutter speed highlighted and ready to be
adjusted.
Ü – 68
[FUNC. ISO/Gain]
Enters the direct setting mode with the ISO speed or gain value highlighted and ready
to be adjusted.
Ü – 70
[FUNC. WB]
Enters the direct setting mode with the white balance highlighted and ready to be
adjusted.
Ü – 76
[S&F Frame Rate]* Allows you to set the shooting frame rate during slow & fast recording mode. Ü – 109
[My Menu] Opens the [My Menu] customized submenu. Ü – 30
[Initialize Media] Opens the [Initialize Media] submenu. Ü Ü 45
[LENS EXCHANGE]* Turns the lens exchange mode on/off. Ü – 34
[User Setting
(NONE)]*
Customizable slot. Assign to the button any menu setting you would like to register. Ü Ü –
Function name Description A
Custom Picture Settings
114
Custom Picture Settings
You can preset a number of picture-related settings (A 117) for clips recorded on a CF card or video output
from the various terminals (except the 3G-SDI terminals and MON. terminals). After changing individual settings
to your preference, you can save the whole set in the camera or SD card as a custom picture file. You can then
load the file at a later date to change the current settings to the preset levels you selected. You can even add
custom picture settings to MXF clips recorded on a CF card or photos recorded on an SD card.
You can save up to 9 different custom picture files on the camera and up to 20 custom picture files on an SD
card. Custom picture files can be copied between the camera and recording media.
Custom picture files created with this camera are compatible only with other C500 and C500 PL cameras.
Selecting Custom Picture Files
Select a custom picture file to apply its settings to your
recordings or to edit, rename, protect, or transfer it.
1 If necessary, set [/ CINEMA Locked] to [Off] (A 58).
2 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.
• The custom picture menu appears. The currently selected
file appears next to the - icon or [Off] if no file is selected.
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is
connected to the camera, you can display the custom
picture menu with the CUSTOM PICT. button.
3 Select the desired file and then press SET.
• Select [Off] to record without applying any custom picture
settings.
• To apply the custom picture settings of the selected file, continue to step 4. To perform other operations on
the selected file (edit settings, copy, protect, etc.), continue instead with the one of the procedures in the
following pages.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
• The selected custom picture file’s settings will be applied. / (camera) or . (SD card) and the custom
picture file’s number will appear on the left of the screen.
NOTES
• About changing custom picture related settings using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller
- If a protected custom picture file or no custom picture file is selected on the camera ([-/ Select File] is
set to [Off]) custom picture related settings cannot be changed using the remote controller.
- While the remote controller is connected to the camera, custom picture files on the SD card ([SD1] to
[SD20]) cannot be used. If you connect the remote controller while a custom picture file on the SD card was
selected, the custom picture file will change automatically to [Off] (recording without custom picture
settings). To use the settings of a custom picture file saved on the SD card, copy the file in advance from the
SD card to an open file slot in the camera (A 116).
- Adjusting custom picture related settings using the remote controller will change the settings registered
under the currently selected custom picture file. If you want to keep an important custom picture file, copy it
in advance to the SD card or select in advance a custom picture file you do not mind changing.
Operating modes:
115
Custom Picture Settings
Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings
1 After selecting a file, select [, / Edit File] and then press SET.
2 Select a setting and then press SET.
3 Change the setting to the desired level and then press SET.
•Refer to
Available Custom Picture Settings
(A 117) for details on the various settings.
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 for other settings, as necessary.
• The new custom picture settings will be applied. / (camera) or . (SD card) and the custom picture file’s
number will appear on the left of the screen.
Resetting the current file’s settings to default values
1 Select [Reset] and then press SET.
2 Select the default values and then press SET.
• Select [NEUTRAL] to reset to neutral default values (equivalent to not using custom picture settings at all) or
[CINEMA] or [EOS Std.] if you want to replicate these preset settings, for example as a starting point to edit
them further.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
Renaming Custom Picture Files
1 After selecting a file, open the [Rename] submenu.
[, / Edit File] > [Rename]
• A screen appears that displays the current file name with an orange
selection frame on the first character.
2 Select an alphanumeric character or symbol then move (Ð) to the next field.
• Change the rest of the name in the same way.
3 Select [Set] and then press SET.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
Protecting Custom Picture Files
Protecting a custom picture file prevents its settings from being
accidentally changed.
Preset Custom Picture Files
By default, the custom picture files in file slots [C8] and [C9] in the camera are protected. Remove the
protection (A 115) to edit the file. The following describes when to use the preset files.
[C8: CINEMA]: Uses the Canon Log gamma and color matrix for an outstanding dynamic range and an
image suitable for processing in post-production.
[C9: EOS Std.]: Reproduces the image quality and look (high contrast, vibrant colors) of an EOS digital SLR
camera with its picture style set to [Standard].
[,
/ Edit File]
[Rename]
[, / Edit File]
[Protect]
Custom Picture Settings
116
1 After selecting a file, open the [Protect] submenu.
[, / Edit File] > [Protect]
2 Select [Protect] and then press SET.
• In the custom picture menu, i will appear next to the file name.
• To remove protection settings, select [Unprotect] instead.
3Press the CUSTOM
PICTURE
button to exit the custom picture menu.
Transferring Custom Picture Files
You can transfer custom picture files between the camera and SD card. When the selected custom picture file is
in the camera, use [Copy To *] or [Load From *] depending on the operation you wish to perform. Similarly,
when the selected custom picture file is on an SD card, use [Copy To Cam.] or [Load From Cam].
Copying a File from the Camera to an SD Card
1 After selecting a file in the camera, open the [Copy To *] submenu.
[+/Transfer File] > [Copy To *]
2 Select the file slot on the SD card under which to save the file and then
press SET.
• If there are available slots, you can select [New File] to save the file in the first available slot.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the SD card, overwriting the file in that slot.
When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
Replacing a File in the Camera with a File on an SD Card
1 After selecting a file in the camera to replace, open the [Load From *]
submenu.
[+/Transfer File] > [Load From *]
2 Select the file to transfer to the camera and then press SET.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The file in the camera will be overwritten by the one on the SD card. When the confirmation screen appears,
press SET.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
Copying a File from an SD Card to the Camera
1 After selecting a file on the SD card, open the [Copy To Cam.]
submenu.
[+/Transfer File] > [Copy To Cam.]
2 Select the file slot under which to save the file and then press SET.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The currently selected file will be copied to the selected slot on the camera, overwriting the file in that slot.
When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
[+/Transfer File]
[Copy To *]
[+/Transfer File]
[Load From *]
[+/Transfer File]
[Copy To Cam.]
117
Custom Picture Settings
Replacing a File on an SD Card with a File in the Camera
1 After selecting a file on the SD card to replace, open the [Load From
Cam.] submenu.
[+/Transfer File] > [Load From Cam.]
2 Select the file to transfer to the SD card and then press SET.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The file on the SD card will be overwritten by the one on the camera. When the confirmation screen
appears, press SET.
4 Press the CUSTOM PICTURE button to exit the custom picture menu.
NOTES
• You can also copy a custom picture file embedded in an MXF clip to the camera (A 136).
Embedding Custom Picture Settings in a Recording
By default, when you record an MXF clip or take a photo with custom
picture settings applied to it, the custom picture file used to record it is
embedded in the image file. Later, those embedded settings in the MXF
clip or photo can be copied to the camera (A 164) and be applied to
future recordings. You may find that embedding custom picture settings in
a recording helps you keep track of them, such as verifying what settings
were used for a particular recording.
1 Open the [Add / File] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Add / File]
2 Select [To Clip] or [To Photo] and then press SET.
• Selecting [To Clip] will embed the custom picture file in a clip, while selecting [To Photo] will embed the file in
a photo.
3 Select [On] or [Off] and then press SET.
Available Custom Picture Settings
The following are the available settings. Even if no custom picture file is selected, the default settings are still
applied to the picture.
[Gamma]
The gamma curve changes the overall look of the image. (Default: [Normal 1]).
[Normal 1] to [Normal 4]: These settings are suitable for viewing the image on a TV monitor. Highlights in
[Normal 2] are brighter than those of [Normal 1]. Dark tones in the lower part of the
gamma curve for [Normal 3] (ITU-R BT.709 standard) and [Normal 4] are more
pronounced than those of [Normal 2].
[Cine 1] or [Cine 2]: Use [Cine 1] for a gamma curve that results in a picture with a cinema-like feel and
cinema-like tones. [Cine 2] has softer contrasts than does [Cine 1] but is also suitable
for creating a cinema-like picture.
[Canon Log]: Applies a logarithmic gamma curve for outstanding dynamic range. Requires image
processing in post-production.
[+/Transfer File]
[Load From Cam.]
[w Other Functions]
[Add / File]
[To Clip] … [On]
[To Photo] … [On]
Custom Picture Settings
118
[EOS Std.]: This gamma curve approximates the look of an EOS digital SLR camera when the
picture style is set to [Standard] (high contrast, vibrant colors).
[Black]
Controls the black level and color cast of blacks.
[Master Pedestal]
The master pedestal increases or decreases the black level. Higher settings will make dark areas brighter but
decrease contrast. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[Master Black]
Corrects color cast in blacks.
[Red]: -50 to 50 (Default: ±0)
[Green]: -50 to 50 (Default: ±0)
[Blue]: -50 to 50 (Default: ±0)
[Black Gamma]
Controls the lower part of the gamma curve (dark areas of the image). This setting is not available when [Gamma]
is set to [Canon Log].
[Level]: Raises or lowers the lower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
[Range]: Selects the range in which dark areas are affected. This setting can be adjusted from -5 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
[Point]: Determines the shape of the lower part of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from -1 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
Normal 1
Canon Log
Input
Output
Canon log
Cine 1
Cine 2
Normal 4
Normal 2/3/4
Normal 3
Normal 1/2
Input
Output
Gamma
Input
Output
Point
Black Gamma
119
Custom Picture Settings
[Low Key Satur.]
Adjusts color saturation in dark areas.
[Enable]: Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [Off])
[Level]: Specifies how saturated colors are in dark areas. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
[Knee]
Controls the upper part of the gamma curve (highlights of the image). By compressing the highlights, you can
prevent parts of the image from being overexposed. This is not available when [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1],
[Cine 2], [Canon Log] or [EOS Std.].
[Enable]: Activates/deactivates the setting. (Default: [On])
[Slope]: Determines the slope of the gamma curve above the knee point. This setting can be adjusted from
-35 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[Point]: Sets the knee point of the gamma curve. This setting can be adjusted from 50 to 109. (Default: 95)
[Saturation]: Adjusts color saturation in highlights. This setting can be adjusted from -10 to 10. (Default: ±0)
[Sharpness]
Sets the sharpness of the output and recording signal.
[Level]: Sets the sharpness level. This setting can be adjusted from -10 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[H Detail Freq.]: Sets the center frequency of horizontal sharpness. Setting higher values increases the
frequency, which, in turn, increases the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.
(Default: ±0)
[Coring]: Reduces noise artifacts caused by high sharpness levels.
[Level]: Sets the coring level. Higher values prevent sharpness from being applied to minute details, resulting in
less noise. This setting can be adjusted from -30 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[D-Ofst]: You can use [D-Ofst], [D-Curve] and [D-Depth] to adjust the coring level based on brightness. [D-Ofst]
sets the coring level of the minimum brightness level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)
[D-Curve]:
Sets the curve of the coring adjustment. This curve is the change from [Level] to [D-Ofst]. This setting
can be adjusted from 0 to 8.
(Default: 0)
[D-Depth]: Sets a multiplier to [D-Ofst] that determines the coring level adjustment based on brightness.
Positive values raise the coring level in dark areas and negative values lower the level. This setting can be
adjusted from -4 to 4. (Default: ±0)
[HV Detail Bal.]: Adjusts the ratio between horizontal and vertical detail. Higher values emphasize vertical detail
while lower values emphasize horizontal detail. This setting can be adjusted from -8 to 8.
(Default: ±0)
[Limit]: Restricts how much sharpness is applied. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
Input
Output
Input
Output
Knee Slope Knee Point
Custom Picture Settings
120
[Select]: In addition to the sharpness set by [Level], [Select] sets the sharpness for areas with higher
frequencies. Higher values apply more sharpness to areas with higher frequencies. Use this for
subjects in which normal sharpening is not effective. This setting is not available when the video
configuration is 720P. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 15. (Default: 0)
[
Knee Aperture
]: Allows you to set the sharpness of only the areas above the knee point by adjusting the gain and
slope. When [Gamma] is set to [Cine 1], [Cine 2], [Canon Log] or [EOS Std.], this setting has no
effect on the picture.
[Gain]: Sets the
amount of sharpness
. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 9. (Default: 0)
[Slope]: Sets the slope of the sharpness. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope,
1 having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope. (Default: 1)
[Level Depend]: Lowers the amount of sharpness applied to dark areas of the image.
[Level]: Sets the brightness of the dark areas of the image that will be affected. This setting can be adjusted
from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)
[Slope]: Determines the slope of the area between the upper and lower parts of the gamma curve. This setting
can be adjusted from 0 to 3, with 0 having no slope, 1 having a steep slope and 3 having a gradual slope.
(Default: 0)
[Offset]: Adjusts the sharpness level of dark areas in the image. Setting higher values will lower the sharpness
level. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 50. (Default: 0)
[Noise Reduction]
Reduces the amount of noise that appears in the image. Select a level from 1 (lowest level) to 12 (highest level),
or select [Off] to turn the noise reduction off. (Default: [Off])
[Skin Detail]
The camera applies a softening filter to areas in the picture with skin tones to give a more pleasant appearance.
By changing these settings, you can determine what areas will be detected as skin tones. A zebra pattern will
appear over areas on the screen that are detected as having skin tones.
[Effect Level]: Adjusts the level of the filter. The available options are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and [High].
(Default: [Off])
[Hue]: Adjusts the hue for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from -16 to 16.
(Default: ±0)
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for detection of skin tones. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
[Selective NR]
The camera detects the characteristics of a certain color or tone and applies a noise reduction filter to the
targeted areas. A zebra pattern will appear over targeted areas on the screen.
[Effect Level]:Adjusts the level of the noise reduction filter. The available options are [Off], [Low], [Middle] and
[High]. (Default: [Off])
[Hue]: Adjusts the hue for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for the color to be detected. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31.
(Default: 16)
121
Custom Picture Settings
[Color Matrix]
Color matrix affects the color tones throughout the whole image. This setting is not available when [Gamma] is
set to [Canon Log].
[
Select
]: Available options are [Normal 1] to [Normal 4], [Cine 1] and [Cine 2], [Canon Log] and [EOS Std.].
Generally, this is the same setting as [Gamma]. After selecting an option, you can make more precise
adjustments. (Default: [Normal 1])
[Gain]: Adjusts the color intensity. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18. (Default: ±0)
[R-G]: The R-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/green and red/magenta gradations. This
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[R-B]: The R-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the cyan/blue and red/yellow gradations. This
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[G-R]: The G-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/red and green/cyan gradations. This
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[G-B]: The G-B matrix changes the tint of the picture along the magenta/blue and green/yellow gradations.
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[B-R]: The B-R matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow/red and blue/cyan gradations. This
setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[B-G]: The B-G matrix changes the tint of the picture along the yellow/green and blue/magenta gradations.
This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[White Balance]
Adjusts the amount of white balance throughout the whole image.
[R Gain]: Adjust the intensity of red tones. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[G Gain]: Adjust the intensity of green tones. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[B Gain]: Adjust the intensity of blue tones. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50. (Default: ±0)
[Color Correction]
The camera detects the characteristics of a certain color (color phase, chroma, area and Y level) and corrects
them when recording. You can set the color correction for up to two different areas (A and B).
[Select Area]: Selects the area or areas to correct. Available options are [Area A], [Area B] and [Area A&B].
Select [Off] to turn this setting off. (Default: [Off])
[Area A Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area A. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Area A Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area A.
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.
(Default: ±0)
[Area B Setting]: Determines the area in which colors will be corrected.
[Phase]: Adjusts the color phase for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 0)
[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Area]: Adjusts the color range for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for area B. This setting can be adjusted from 0 to 31. (Default: 16)
[Area B Revision]: Sets the amount of correction for area B.
[Level]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color saturation. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
Custom Picture Settings
122
[Phase]: Adjusts the amount of correction to the color phase. This setting can be adjusted from -18 to 18.
(Default: ±0)
[Other Functions]
[Setup Level]: Adjusts the black level set by the [Black] and [Master Pedestal] settings.
[Level]: Determines the amount of adjustment to be made. This setting can be adjusted from -50 to 50.
(Default: ±0)
[Press]: Compresses the dynamic range of the video signal so that it does not exceed 100%. Available options
are [On] and [Off]. (Default: [Off])
[Clip At 100%]: When the video signal exceeds 100%, this function clips the white level at 100%. Available
options are [On] and [Off]. (Default: [Off])
NOTES
• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camera, the following custom picture
settings can be changed using the buttons and dials on the remote controller. They cannot be changed from
the camera while the RC-V100 is connected. If necessary, use the buttons and dials on the remote controller
to adjust them.
- [Black] > [Master Pedestal]; [Black] > [Master Black] > [Red], [Blue]
- [Black Gamma] > [Level]
- [Knee] > [Slope] and [Point] (only when [Knee] > [Enable] is set to [On])
- [Sharpness] > [Level]
- [White Balance] > [R Gain], [B Gain]
123
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays
Customize the camera to match your shooting style and needs. Use the [w Other Functions] > [Custom
Function] setting to adjust how some of the camera’s controls and functions operate in mode. Similarly,
use the [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] setting to customize the onscreen
displays that appear on the screen during recording. You can save these preferences along with other menu
settings to an SD card and use them again later (A 125).
Customizing Functions
The following table describes which functions can be customized using
[Custom Function].
1 Open the [Custom Function] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Custom Function]
2 Select the desired function.
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.
Operating modes:
[w Other Functions]
[Custom Function]
Customizable Functions with [Custom Function]
Menu item Setting options Description
[Shockless WB] [On], [Off] Creates a softer transition when the white balance is changed.
[Control Dial]
2 [Iris], [ISO/Gain], [Off]
3 [ISO/Gain], [Off]
Selects the function of the control dial.
[Grip Ctrl Dial]
2 [Iris], [ISO/Gain], [Off]
3 [ISO/Gain], [Off]
Selects the function of the control dial on the grip unit of the C300 / C300 PL or C100
camcorder, which can be attached to the GRIP terminal.
[Control Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal] Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the control dial.
[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal]
Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the control dial on the grip unit
of the C300 / C300 PL or C100 camcorder, which can be attached to the GRIP terminal.
[SELECT Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal] Changes the direction of the adjustment when operating the SELECT dial.
[Retract Lens] [On], [Off]
When one of the following optional Canon lenses is attached to the camera and the
focus mode switch on the lens is set to AF, if this setting is set to [On], the lens will
retract fully when the camera is turned off.
• Canon EF 40mm f/2.8 STM lens, EF-S 24mm f/2.8 STM lens, EF 50mm f/1.8 STM lens
[F. Assist. B&W] [Both], [Magnify], [Peaking], [Off]
Automatically switches the screen and output from the MON. terminals to B&W while the
focus assist functions (peaking and magnification) are activated. You can have the screen
and output from the MON. terminals switch to B&W when only the peaking is activated,
when only the magnification is activated or when both are activated.
[Magn. Add. Disp.] [Peaking], [Edge Mon.], [Off] Displays peaking or the edge monitor when magnification is enabled.
[3D Rec Mode] [On], [Off]
When using another C500 or C500 PL camera to shoot 3D, this function
compensates for the video and audio signals output from the 3G-SDI terminals and
MON. terminals not being synchronized.
[Scan Reverse Rec] [Both], [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Off]
Inverts the recorded image horizontally and/or vertically. This also inverts the image
output from the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals, HD/SD SDI terminal and HDMI
OUT terminal.
[Character Rec] [On], [Off]
When this function is set to [On], all of the onscreen displays will be recorded on the CF
card exactly as they appear on the screen.
[C START/STOP] [On], [Off]
Selects whether the START/STOP button will be active or locked too when the
Q switch is set to C (key lock) (A 53).
Customizing Functions and Onscreen Displays
124
Customizing Onscreen Displays
For details on which onscreen displays can be customized, refer to
Onscreen Displays
(A 55). For details on the setting options, refer to
[Custom Display 1] and [Custom Display 2]
(A 172).
1 Open the [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2] submenu.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 1] or [Custom Display 2]
2 Select the desired onscreen display.
3 Change the setting option and then press SET.
Operating modes:
[£ LCD/VF Setup]
[Custom Display 1]
[Custom Display 2]
125
Saving and Loading Camera Settings
Saving and Loading Camera Settings
After you adjust custom picture settings and settings in the various menus, you can save those settings on an
SD card. You can load those settings at a later date or on another C500 or C500 PL camera so that you can use
that camera in that same exact way.
Saving Camera Settings to an SD Card
1 Open the [Save To *] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Transfer Menu//] > [Save To *]
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] and then press SET.
• Selecting [Menu] will save menu settings and [Menu+/] will save
menu and custom picture settings.
3 Select [OK] and press SET.
• The current settings are saved to the SD card. If the SD card already has camera settings on it, they will be
overwritten.
4 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.
Loading Camera Settings from an SD Card
1 Open the [Load From *] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Transfer Menu//] > [Load From *]
2 Select [Menu] or [Menu+/] and then press SET.
• Selecting [Menu] will load menu settings and [Menu+/] will load
menu and custom picture settings.
3 Select [OK] and press SET.
• After the camera’s current settings are replaced with the settings saved on the SD card, the screen will turn
black momentarily and the camera will restart.
NOTES
• The SD card includes a text file that lists the camera settings. You can check the settings by using a USB card
reader to access the SD card on a computer. In the “PRIVATE\CAMSET” folder, open the file “CAMSET5.TXT”.
• When loading camera settings from an SD card, even protected custom picture files in the camera will be
replaced.
• For your protection, when the camera’s settings are saved on an SD card, the following settings under
[w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi Remote] are not saved: the encryption key/WEP index key in the wireless LAN
setup of each of the configuration files [No. 1] to [No. 5] and the password in the camera settings.
• Only camera settings from other C500 / C500 PL cameras can be used with this camera.
Operating modes:
[w Other Functions]
[Transfer Menu//]
[Save To *]
[w Other Functions]
[Transfer Menu//]
[Load From *]
Saving and Loading Camera Settings
126
5
127
Playback
Playing Back MXF Clips
This section explains how to play back clips recorded on a CF card. For details on playing back clips using an
external monitor, refer to
Connecting to an External Monitor
(A 146). For details on viewing photos on the SD
card, refer to
Viewing Photos
(A 161). You cannot use this camera to play back video recorded in 4K or 2K
mode on an external recorder. For details on developing RAW clips in order to play them back, refer to
Developing RAW Clips
(A 152).
Clip Index Screen
Playback functions are accessed from the clip index screen. To open the
clip index screen, set the camera to mode. If the CF card contains
a clip with a system frequency that is different from the camera’s current
settings, then playback is not possible. In such case, change the [ 4K/
2K/MXF Setup] > [System Frequency] setting as necessary (A 53).
Set the Q switch to MEDIA.
• The camera switches to mode and the clip index screen appears.
Operating modes:
87 9
13
12
2
1
4
14
10
11
3
6
5
15
16 17
Playing Back MXF Clips
128
* For clips recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both be displayed.
v
Switching Between the CF Card Slots
If both CF card slots contain a CF card, you can switch between them as
necessary.
Press the SLOT SELECT button.
• The access indicator of the selected CF card slot will illuminate in green.
Switching to Other Index Screens
All of the clips on a CF card can be accessed from the clip index screen.
However, you can switch to other index screens that show only clips with
an $ mark ([$ Mark] index screen), clips with a % mark ([% Mark]
index screen), or photos* ([Photos] index screen).
* Photos are saved on the SD card.
1 Press the INDEX button.
• The index screen selection menu appears.
2 Select the desired index screen and then press SET.
• The selected index screen appears.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• Press the INDEX button again to return to the clip index screen.
Playing Back Clips
You can play back clips from the clip index screen, [$ Mark] index
screen and [% Mark] index screen. Use the playback control buttons
on the monitor unit. When the monitor unit is not attached, you have
limited playback control options (play/pause/stop only) with the
buttons on the camera and full playback control options using the
joystick and joystick guide.
1 Move the orange selection frame to the clip you want to play
back.
2Press the
Ò button to start playback.
• Playback will start from the clip selected and continue until the end
of the last clip in the index screen. When the last frame of the last
clip is reached, playback will be paused.
Operating modes:
1 $ mark/% mark (A 103, 134)
2 Orange selection frame
3 Relay recording: Appears when a clip begins on
one CF card and continues on the other. (A 46)
4Shot mark (A 102, 138)
5 Recording date and time
6Clip name (A 53)
7Temperature warning icon (A 186)
8 Clip thumbnail (A 139)
9 Currently selected CF card slot (A 46)
10 Clip number / Total number of clips
11 Recording date (month and day only) and time
12 Special recording mode (A 105)
13 Time code of thumbnail
14 Total recording time
15 Embedded custom picture file (A 114)
16 Bit rate and resolution (A 60)
17 Frame rate*
129
Playing Back MXF Clips
• Press the Ò button again or press SET to pause/resume the playback.
• Press the Ñ button to stop the playback and return to the index screen.
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do
so may result in permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not open the cover of the CF card slot being accessed.
NOTES
• You may notice brief stops in video or audio playback between clips.
Onscreen Displays
1
Appears when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Metadata Display] > [Camera Data] is set to [On].
2
Appears when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Metadata Display] > [Date/Time] is set to [On].
3
When playing back clips that were recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will
both be displayed.
7 8 910
14
11
12
18
19
20
1
2
4
5
6
13
16
15
3
17
1 Remaining battery time (A 56)
2 Joystick guide (A 130)
3 Shutter speed
1
(A 67)
4 2 Aperture value
1
(A 74)
5 ISO speed/Gain
1
(A 70)
6 Recording date and time
2
7 Playback operation
8 Selected CF card
9 Relay recording
10 $ mark/% mark (A 103, 134)
11 Time code (A 84)
12 Clip number / Total number of clips
13 Bit rate (A 64)/Recording mode (A 60)
14 Resolution (A 62, 64)
15 Frame rate (A 60)
3
16 Embedded custom picture file (A 114)
17 Output displays (A 151)
18 User bit (A 87)
19 Audio output channel (A 96)
20 Audio level meter
Playing Back MXF Clips
130
Playback Controls
When you play back a clip, operate the buttons on camera’s body or
on the monitor unit or use the joystick and joystick guide to use fast
playback, play back frame-by-frame or skip clips. Refer to the
following table.
Available Playback Types
NOTES
• There is no audio during any of the playback types listed in the previous table.
• During some special playback modes, you may notice some anomalies (blocky video artifacts, banding, etc.)
in the playback picture.
• The speed indicated on the screen is approximate.
• During frame advance, the time advanced between frames depends on the video configuration used:
0.2 seconds (for 1280x720/24.00P, 1280x720/23.98P or 1280x720/59.94P), 0.25 seconds (for 1280x720/
50.00P) and 0.5 seconds for other video configurations.
• You can press the DISP. button to turn the joystick guide display on and off.
Playback type Operation
Fast playback
Buttons: Press the Ø or × button.
Joystick: During playback, push the joystick up or down.
Repeat to increase the playback speed to approximately
5x J 15x J 60x the normal speed.
Frame advance/reverse
Joystick: During playback pause, push the joystick up or
down.
Skip to the beginning of
the next clip
Buttons: Press the Ù button.
Joystick: Push the joystick right.
Skip to the beginning of
the current clip
Buttons: Press the Ú button.
Joystick: Push the joystick left.
Skip to the previous clip
Buttons: Press the Ú button twice.
Joystick: Push the joystick left twice.
Return to playback mode
Buttons: Press the Ò button.
Joystick: Press the joystick itself (SET button).
7 Playback operation
* The playback speed (x5, x15 or x60) will also appear in the indicator.
9 Relay recording
Appears when a clip begins on one CF card and continues uninterrupted on the other. 5 indicates the first
part of the recording, 6 indicates the middle part(s) and 7 indicates the last part.
Ð PLAY Playback
Ý PAUSE Playback pause
Ô/Ó Frame reverse/Frame advance
F FWD × Fast playback*
Ø F REV Fast reverse playback*
131
Playing Back MXF Clips
Audio Output
During playback, audio will be available through the × (headphone)
terminal. You can adjust the headphone volume with the [¡ Audio
Setup] > [Audio Output] > [Headphone Volume] setting. The audio
signal will also be output through the HD/SD SDI terminal and the
HDMI OUT terminal.
NOTES
• For details on changing the audio channel, refer to
Selecting the
Audio Channel
(A 96).
× (headphone)
terminal
MXF Clip Operations
132
MXF Clip Operations
Besides playing back a clip, you can perform other operations such as deleting a clip or displaying clip
information. This is done through the clip menu, which contains different functions depending on the index
screen. You can use the functions in the [w Other Functions] menu to perform some of the operations on all the
clips. Refer to the following table for available functions and refer to the following pages for more details of the
functions.
Clip Menu Functions
1
Includes also the [Shot Mark 1] and [Shot Mark 2] index screens.
2
[$ Mark] index screen only.
3
[% Mark] index screen only.
4
[Expand Clip] index screen only.
Using the Clip Menu
1 Select a clip and then press SET.
• The clip menu appears. Available functions depend on the index screen and which functions are enabled.
2 Select the desired function and then press SET.
Operating modes:
Menu item Description
Index screen
A
Clip
[$ Mark]/
[% Mark]
[Shot Mark]
1
/
[Expand Clip]
[Display Clip Info] Displays various information about a clip. Ü Ü – 133
[Add $ Mark]/
[Delete $ Mark]
Adds or deletes an $ mark. Ü Ü
2
– 134
[Add % Mark]/
[Delete % Mark]
Adds or deletes a % mark. Ü Ü
3
– 134
[Copy Clip] Copies a clip from one CF card to the other. Ü Ü
2
– 135
[Delete Clip] Deletes a clip. Ü Ü
3
– 136
[Shot Mark]
Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that
have either shot mark.
Ü Ü – 137
[Shot Mark 1]
Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that
have the " mark.
Ü Ü – 137
[Shot Mark 2]
Displays an index screen of all the frames of a clip that
have the # mark.
Ü Ü – 137
[Expand Clip]
Displays an index screen that shows frames of a clip at
a fixed interval.
Ü Ü – 138
[Delete User Memo] Deletes the user memo and GPS information of a clip. Ü Ü – 136
[Copy / File] Copies the custom picture file from a clip to the camera. Ü Ü – 136
[Add Shot Mark 1]/
[Del. Shot Mark 1]
Adds or deletes a " mark. – – Ü 138
[Add Shot Mark 2]/
[Del. Shot Mark 2]
Adds or deletes a # mark. – – Ü 138
[Fewer Index Pics] Decreases the number of thumbnails that are displayed. – – Ü
4
138
[More Index Pics] Increases the number of thumbnails that are displayed. – – Ü
4
138
[Pause]
Switches to playback of a clip with playback paused on
the selected frame.
– – Ü –
[Set Index Picture] Sets the thumbnail used in the clip index screen. – – Ü 139
133
MXF Clip Operations
• The function is enabled. For some functions, further action may be required. Follow the onscreen directions.
• Press the CANCEL button instead to return to the clip index screen.
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the CF2 or CF3 access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do
so may result in permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not open the cover of the either CF card slot.
Displaying Clip Information
Select [Display Clip Info] in the clip menu to display the selected clip’s information screen ([Clip Info] screen).
Push the joystick left/right to switch to the previous/next clip. When you are finished, press the CANCEL button
to return to the clip index screen.
* When displaying clips that were recorded using slow & fast motion mode, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will
both be displayed.
Displaying the Lens Information (2) and User Memo
From the [Clip Info] screen, push the joystick up or turn the SELECT dial up to display the [Lens & Q] screen.
In this screen you can check details about the lens used to record the clip. If the clip has an embedded user
memo, you will see the user memo content in this screen as well. Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT
dial down to return to the [Clip Info] screen.
10
467
1
2
3
9
11
14
15
16
17
18
12
13
5 8
1 Thumbnail of the selected clip
2 Thumbnail of the previous clip
3 Thumbnail of the next clip
4Shot mark (A 102, 138)
5GPS information
6 Special recording mode (A 105)
7 Currently selected CF card slot (A 46)
8 Clip number / Total number of clips
9 Recording date and time
10 Clip name (A 53)
11 Bit rate and resolution (A 60)
12 Frame rate (A 60)*
13 $ mark / % mark (A 103, 134)
14 Embedded custom picture file (A 114)
15 Time code of the clip thumbnail
16 Time code of the first frame in clip
17 Time code of the last frame in clip
18 Clip duration
MXF Clip Operations
134
Displaying Custom Picture Settings
When displaying the [Clip Info] screen of a clip that has a custom picture file recorded with it, push the joystick
down or turn the SELECT dial down to display the first of three screens with the clip’s custom picture settings
([/ Data 1/3] screen). Push the joystick down or turn the SELECT dial down to switch the [/ Data 2/3] screen
J [/ Data 3/3] screen J [Lens & Q] screen J [Clip Info] screen.
Adding $ Marks or % Marks
If you add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to a clip, you can later display an index screen that shows only
the clips with an $ mark or only the clips with a % mark. Furthermore, you cannot delete clips with an $ mark
so you can use it to protect important clips.
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark during Playback
To add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an
assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] in advance.
1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 111).
• To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another
assignable button to [Add % Mark].
2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button to add the clip mark.
• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.
• Adding a clip mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.
Adding an $ Mark or % Mark from the Index Screen
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The screen changes back to the clip index screen and an $ mark or % appears next to the selected clip’s
thumbnail.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
NOTES
• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and % mark at the same time. When you add a % mark to a clip with an
$ mark, the $ mark will be deleted. Similarly, when you add an $ mark to a clip with a % mark, the %
mark will be deleted.
Deleting $ Marks or % Marks
Deleting an $ Mark or % Mark from a Clip
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Delete $ Mark] or [Delete % Mark] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The screen changes back to the clip index screen the selected mark is deleted.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
135
MXF Clip Operations
Deleting $ Marks from All Clips
1 Open the [Delete All $ Marks] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Delete All $ Marks]
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• All $ marks from clips on the selected CF card will be deleted.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the $ marks are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Copying Clips
You can copy clips from one CF card to the other. The copied clips will retain their original name.
Copying a Single Clip
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Copy Clip] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation. You can also check the
available space on both CF cards.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the clip is being copied, you can press SET to cancel.
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
• The selected clip is copied to the other CF card and the screen changes back to the clip index screen.
Copying All Clips
1 Open the [Copy All Clips] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Copy All Clips]
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• All of the clips on the selected CF card will be copied to the other CF
card.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the clips are being copied, you can press SET to cancel.
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Copying All Clips with an $ Mark
1Open the [Copy $ Clips] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Copy $ Clips]
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• All of the clips with an $ mark on the selected CF card will be copied
to the other CF card.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the clips are being copied, you can press SET to cancel.
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
[w Other Functions]
[Delete All $ Marks]
[w Other Functions]
[Clips]
[Copy All Clips]
[w Other Functions]
[Clips]
[Copy $ Clips]
MXF Clip Operations
136
NOTES
• You cannot copy a clip if either CF card slot cover is open.
• If a clip is being copied to a card that already has a clip with the same number (the last 4 digits in the clip
name), then the copied clip will be renamed with the following number.
Deleting Clips
You can delete any clip except those with an $ mark. To delete such clips, delete the $ mark beforehand.
Deleting a Single Clip
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Delete Clip] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the clip is being deleted, the operation cannot be canceled.
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Deleting All Clips
1 Open the [Delete All Clips] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Clips] > [Delete All Clips]
2 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• All of the clips (except for clips with an $ mark) on the selected CF
card will be deleted.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the clips are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.
3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Deleting the User Memo
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Delete User Memo] and then press SET.
• The [Delete User Memo] screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The user memo and GPS information is deleted and the screen changes back to the clip index screen.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
Copying a Custom Picture File Embedded in a Clip
You can copy the custom picture file embedded in a clip to the camera.
1 Select the desired clip (a clip with the / icon) and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.
[w Other Functions]
[Clips]
[Delete All Clips]
137
MXF Clip Operations
•The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a custom picture file slot in the
camera.
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.
• You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to display the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]
screens.
3 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot and then press SET.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The custom picture file already in the selected file slot will be overwritten.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
NOTES
• You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file.
• By default, file slots [C8] and [C9] are protected.
Displaying an Index Screen of Shot Marks
After you add shot marks to a clip, you can display an index screen that contains all the frames in a clip with
either shot mark, only the " mark or only the # mark. When you play back a clip from this index screen,
playback will start from the frame indicated by the shot mark. You can also perform other operations from this
index screen, such as adding and deleting shot marks.
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Shot Mark] and then press SET.
• The [Shot Mark] index screen appears, which contains all the frames with shot marks in the clip. Select
instead [Shot Mark 1] to display an index screen only of the frames with the " mark or [Shot Mark 2] to
display an index screen only of the frames with the # mark.
• The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame with the shot mark.
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen.
NOTES
• After you finish playing back a clip from this index screen, the index screen that was open before the [Shot
Mark] index screen will appear.
Time code of the
frame with the
shot mark
MXF Clip Operations
138
Displaying a Frame Index Screen of a Single Clip
You can display an index screen of a single clip broken down as frames at fixed intervals. This is useful when you
have a long clip or wish to play back a clip from a certain point. You can change how many thumbnails are
displayed. You can also perform other operations from this index screen, such as adding and deleting shot
marks.
1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.
2 Select [Expand Clip] and then press SET.
• The [Expand Clip] index screen appears, which shows thumbnails of frames taken from the clip at fixed
intervals. The time code under the thumbnail indicates the time code of the frame.
• You can change the fixed interval between frames by showing more or fewer thumbnails. To show more
thumbnails, open the clip menu and select [More Index Pics] and then press SET. To show fewer
thumbnails, select [Fewer Index Pics] and then press SET.
• Press the INDEX button or CANCEL button to return to the clip index screen.
NOTES
• After you finish playing back a clip from this index screen, the index screen that was open before the [Expand
Clip] index screen will appear.
Adding Shot Marks
You can add shot marks (", # or both) to shots in a clip you want to set apart. Later, you can display an index
screen that shows only the clips with a " mark, only the clips with a # mark, or only clips with either shot mark.
Adding Shot Marks during Playback
To add an " mark or # mark to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an assignable
button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] in advance.
1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] (A 111).
2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button at the point in the clip to add the
shot mark.
• A message indicating the shot mark appears on the screen and the shot mark is added to the clip.
• Adding a shot mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.
Adding Shot Marks from the Index Screen
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.
Time code of the
displayed frame
Thumbnail icon:
Indicates the frame
used as the clip
thumbnail in the clip
index screen.
139
MXF Clip Operations
3 Select [Add Shot Mark 1] or [Add Shot Mark 2] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The screen changes back to the previous index screen and the selected shot mark appears next to the
selected clip’s thumbnail.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
NOTES
• Up to 100 shot marks (" and # marks combined) can be added to a single clip.
• There may be up to a 0.5 second delay from when you press the button to when the camera adds the shot
mark.
Deleting Shot Marks
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.
3 Select [Del. Shot Mark 1] or [Del. Shot Mark 2] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The selected mark is deleted and the screen changes back to the previous index screen.
• If a frame has no shot marks, it will no longer appear in the [Shot Mark] index screen.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
Changing a Clip’s Thumbnail
You can change the thumbnail that appears in the clip index screen to a thumbnail of a frame that appears in the
[Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.
1 Open the [Shot Mark] index screen or [Expand Clip] index screen.
2 Select the desired frame (thumbnail) and then press SET to open the clip menu.
3 Select [Set Index Picture] and then press SET.
• The clip information screen appears and it prompts you to confirm the operation.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The selected frame is set as the thumbnail and the screen changes back to the previous index screen.
R appears next to the thumbnail of the selected frame.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
NOTES
• When playing back a clip from the clip index screen, playback will start from the beginning of the clip,
regardless of the thumbnail.
MXF Clip Operations
140
6
141
External Connections
Video Output Configuration
The video signal output from the MON. terminals, HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT
terminal depends on the clip’s video configuration, the capability of the external monitor (for video output from
the HDMI OUT terminal) and on various menu settings. The HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC
OUT terminal are able to output the onscreen displays and superimpose them on the picture of an external
monitor (A 151).
Video Configuration and Video Output Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes
Refer to the following tables for the video configuration for recording, video configuration recorded on the CF
card and video output configuration from each terminal during 4K and 2K modes.
Operating modes:
Video configuration
for recording
MON.
terminals
1, 2, 3
HD/SD SDI
terminal
4, 5, 6
System
priority
Recording
mode
Resolution Frame rate HD
3
SD
4K
RAW
4096×2160
3840×2160
59.94P
1080/29.97PsF
7
1080/59.94i
7
1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
480/59.94i
29.97P 1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF) 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)
50.00P
1080/25.00PsF
7
1080/50.00i
7
1080/25.00 (P/PsF) 576/50.00i
25.00P 1080/25.00 (P/PsF)
24.00P 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) –
HRAW
4K1K RAW
4096×1080
3840×1080
8
59.94P
1080/29.97PsF
7
1080/59.94i
7
720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P
1080/25.00PsF
7
1080/50.00i
7
720/50.00P 576/50.00i
2K
12-bit
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
1080/29.97PsF
7
1080/59.94i
7
1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
480/59.94i
29.97P 1080/29.97 (P/PsF)
23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF) 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)
50.00P
1080/25.00PsF
7
1080/50.00i
7
1080/25.00 (P/PsF) 576/50.00i
25.00P 1080/25.00 (P/PsF)
24.00P 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) 1080/24.00 (P/PsF) –
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
1080/29.97PsF
7
1080/59.94i
7
720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P
1080/25.00PsF
7
1080/50.00i
7
720/50.00P 576/50.00i
Video Output Configuration
142
1
The resolution will be set to 1920x1080. When [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)] or [2K (2048/1920)] > [Resolution]
is set to [4096x2160], [4096x1080] or [2048x1080], you can select 2048x1080 or 1920x1080 for the output (A 147).
2
The camera can apply onscreen markers, zebra patterns, peaking and magnification to the MON. 1 terminal output. The
camera can apply magnification to the MON. 2 terminal output.
3
Depending on the signal, you can switch between the P and PsF setting (A 147, 149) for output.
4
Set [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) or [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) > [HD/SD SDI] > [Output] to [HD], [SD]
or [Off].
5
You can display zebra patterns on an external monitor during HD output (A 83). Zebra patterns will not be output during SD
output.
6
When the camera is connected via HDMI OUT terminal to an external monitor, the video signal output from the HD/SD SDI
terminal will be the same as that from the HDMI OUT terminal.
7
When the resolution is 2048x1080, the scan mode is PsF. When the resolution is 1920x1080, the scan mode is interlaced.
8
HRAW only.
9
Video output will automatically switch to HD or SD, depending on the capability of the external monitor.
10
Set [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) or [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) > [SYNC OUT] > [Output] to [HD-Y]
(HD component video, luminance signal) or [Composite] (SD analog composite signal).
Video configuration
for recording
HDMI OUT
terminal
5, 9
SYNC OUT
terminal
10
System
priority
Recording mode Resolution Frame rate HD SD HD SD
4K
RAW
4096×2160
3840×2160
59.94P
1080/59.94i 480/59.94P 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i29.97P
23.98P
50.00P
1080/50.00i 576/50.00P 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P
24.00P 1080/60.00i – 1080/60.00i –
HRAW
4096×1080
3840×1080
59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
2K
12-bit
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P
1080/59.94i 480/59.94P 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i29.97P
23.98P
50.00P
1080/50.00i 576/50.00P 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P
24.00P 1080/60.00i – 1080/60.00i –
10-bit
2048×1080
1920×1080
59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i
50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
143
Video Output Configuration
Video Output Configuration for MXF Mode
Refer to the following table for the video output configuration from each terminal during recording and playback.
1
Depending on the signal, you can switch between the P and PsF setting (A 147) for output.
2
Set [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) or [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) > [HD/SD SDI] > [Output] to [HD], [SD]
or [Off].
3
You can display zebra patterns on an external monitor during HD output (A 83). Zebra patterns will not be output during SD
output.
4
When the camera is connected via HDMI OUT terminal to an external monitor, the video signal output from the HD/SD SDI
terminal will be the same as that from the HDMI OUT terminal.
5
Video output will automatically switch to HD or SD, depending on the capability of the external monitor.
6
Set [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) or [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) > [SYNC OUT] > [Output] to [HD-Y] (HD
component video, luminance signal) or [Composite] (SD analog composite signal).
Operating modes:
Video configuration
HD/SD SDI
terminal
2, 3, 4
HDMI OUT
terminal
3, 5
SYNC OUT
terminal
6
Resolution Frame rate
HD
1
( mode)
HD
( mode)
SD HD SD HD SD
1920×1080
1440×1080
59.94i 1080/59.94i
1080/59.94i 480/59.94i 1080/59.94i 480/59.94P 1080/59.94i 480/59.94i
29.97P
1080/29.97
(P/PsF)
23.98P
1080/23.98
(P/PsF)
50.00i 1080/50.00i
1080/50.00i 576/50.00i 1080/50.00i 576/50.00P 1080/50.00i 576/50.00i
25.00P
1080/25.00
(P/PsF)
24.00P
1080/24.00
(P/PsF)
1080/60.00i – 1080/60.00i – 1080/60.00i –
1280×720
59.94P 720/59.94P
720/59.94P 480/59.94i 720/59.94P 480/59.94P 720/59.94P 480/59.94i29.97P 720/29.97P
23.98P 720/23.98P
50.00P 720/50.00P
720/50.00P 576/50.00i 720/50.00P 576/50.00P 720/50.00P 576/50.00i
25.00P 720/25.00P
24.00P 720/24.00P 720/60.00P – 720/60.00P – 720/60.00P –
Selecting the Color Space
144
Selecting the Color Space
You can select the color space of the video that is output from the 3G-SDI terminal or MON. terminals. If you
select a color space with a wider range of colors than that of BT. 709, you can improve the color reproduction in
the video. When checking the output, you will need a display device that is compatible with each color space.
1 Open the [Color Space] submenu.
[~ Camera Setup] > [Color Space]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• The color space of the video output from the 3G-SDI terminal and
MON. terminals will change accordingly.
Options
Operating modes:
[BT. 709]: Standard color space that is compatible with sRGB
specifications.
[DCI-P3+]: Color space that retains the hues of DCI-P3, which is a color
space whose guidelines were established by the DCI (Digital
Cinema Initiatives), and possesses a wider color gamut than
that of DCI-P3 and BT. 709 (sRGB). DCI-P3+ has good color
reproduction of subjects with high-color intensity. Because this
color space extends the gamut of high-intensity colors without
changing hues, you can use it for the DCI workflow just by
adjusting the intensity.
[C. Gamut]: Cinema Gamut. Color space developed by Canon and based
on the specific characteristics of the camera’s sensor. Features
a wider color gamut than that of DCI-P3+. Use this setting with
workflows that require ACES color space.
[BT. 2020]: Color space that meets ITU-R BT.2020 standards, which
defines parameters for ultra-high-definition television (4K/8K).
[~ Camera Setup]
[Color Space]
[BT. 709]
Cinema Gamut
DCI-P3+
DCI-P3
BT. 709
Visual range
BT. 2020
145
Selecting the Color Space
Available color space and gamma curve settings
The color space and gamma curve of the video output by the 3G-SDI terminal and MON. terminals depend on
the combination of settings.
1
Refers to the LUT setting of the MON. terminals (A 148).
2
Refers to the ACESproxy10 setting of the MON. 2 terminal (A 148).
Terminal
[Color Space]
setting
LUT setting
1
[ACESPX10]
setting
2
Terminal output
Color space Gamma
3G-SDI
[BT. 709]
– –
BT. 709 Canon Log
[DCI-P3+] DCI-P3+ Canon Log
[C. Gamut] Cinema Gamut Canon Log
[BT. 2020] BT. 2020 Canon Log
MON. 1 / MON. 2
[BT. 709]
[BT. 709]
Off
BT. 709
BT. 709
[Wide DR] Wide DR
[DCI] DCI
[Off] Canon Log
[DCI-P3+]
[BT. 709]
DCI-P3+
BT. 709
[Wide DR] Wide DR
[DCI] DCI
[Off] Canon Log
[C. Gamut]
[BT. 709]
Cinema Gamut
BT. 709
[Wide DR] Wide DR
[DCI] DCI
[Off] Canon Log
[BT. 2020]
[BT. 709]
BT. 2020
BT. 709
[Wide DR] Wide DR
[Off] Canon Log
MON. 2 only
[BT. 709]
[DCI-P3+]
[C. Gamut]
[BT. 709]
[Wide DR]
[DCI]
[Off]
MON. 2 ACES ACESproxy10
Connecting to an External Monitor
146
Connecting to an External Monitor
When you connect the camera to an external monitor for recording or playback, use the terminal on the camera
that matches the one you wish to use on the monitor. Then, select the video signal output configuration
(A 141). The camera can output video from all of the video output terminals simultaneously.
Connection Diagram
When you connect the camera to an external monitor using the SYNC OUT terminal, use headphones to monitor
the sound (A 96).
We recommend that you power the camera from a household power outlet using the compact power adapter.
Operating modes:
HDMI IN
VIDEO IN or COMPONENT IN (Y)
HD SDI IN
BNC cable
(commercially
available)
BNC cable
(commercially
available)
HDMI cable
(commercially
available)
HDMI OUT
terminal
SYNC OUT
terminal
HD SDI IN
BNC cable
(commercially
available)
HD/SD SDI
terminal
MON. 1 terminal
MON. 2 terminal
HD SDI IN
147
Connecting to an External Monitor
Using the MON. 1 and MON. 2 Terminals
During 4K and 2K modes, the camera can output video from the MON. 1 and MON. 2 terminals (MON.
terminals). The signal that is output from the MON. terminals also includes audio, time code, metadata and clip
name information. In addition, the camera can apply onscreen markers, zebra patterns, peaking and
magnification* to the MON. 1 terminal output. Perform the following procedures to enable output from the MON.
terminals and to adjust other related settings.
* Magnification will simultaneously be applied to the MON. 2 terminal output.
Enabling Output from the MON. Terminals
1 Open the [Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [Output]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
• Output is enabled for the MON. terminals.
• If you do not intend to use the MON. terminals, select [Off]. Doing so
will also conserve the camera’s power.
Selecting the Resolution of the Output
When the resolution of the video configuration is [3840x2160],
[3840x1080] or [1920x1080], the resolution of the output is automatically
set to 1920x1080 so this procedure is not necessary.
1 Open the [Resolution] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [Resolution]
2 Select [2048x1080] or [1920x1080] and then press SET.
Selecting the Scan Mode of the Output
When the recording mode of the video configuration is [HRAW], [4K1K
RAW] or [ 10-bit], this procedure is not necessary because this
function will be set automatically based on the resolution.
1 Open the [Scan Mode] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [Scan Mode]
2 Select [P] or [PsF] and then press SET.
Selecting the Resizing Method
When the recorded video and video output have a different aspect ratio,
perform the following procedure to select how the video is output.
1 Open the [Resize Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [Resize Output]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1 & 2]
[Output]
[On]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1 & 2]
[Resolution]
[1920x1080]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1 & 2]
[Scan Mode]
[P]
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1 & 2]
[Resize Output]
[Letterbox]
Connecting to an External Monitor
148
Options
NOTES
• For [Letterbox], because the camera uses a simple conversion process vertically, diagonal lines may appear
jagged.
• For MON. terminal output during 4K mode, because the camera uses a simple conversion process, color
shifting may be visible.
• If you set an assignable button to [Resize MON. Output] (A 111), you can press the button to switch the
resizing method.
Applying a LUT to Canon Log Gamma
When checking video recorded with Canon Log gamma on an external
monitor connected to a MON. terminal or the HD/SD-SDI terminal, you
can apply a LUT.
1 Open the [Select] submenu (under [LUT]).
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [MON. 1 & 2] or [HD/SD SDI] > [Select]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
3 Press LUT.
• The selected LUT will be applied.
• You can also apply the LUT with the [ 4K/2K/MXF] > [MON. 1 & 2] or [HD/SD SDI] > [LUT]
Options
Video Output Using ACESproxy10 (for On-set Color Grading)
You can have the camera convert the video from the MON. 2 terminal to
ACESproxy10-compliant video and output it. By checking the results with a compatible display device, you can
see post-production video while on set.
1 Open the [ACESPX10] submenu.
[4K/2K/MXF] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [ACESPX10]
[Letterbox]:
The picture is reduced in size while maintaining the aspect ratio and black letterbox bars are added to
the top and bottom of the image so that the picture has a 16:9 aspect ratio.
[Squeeze]: The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire image fits within the screen. The image
will appear normal if the external monitor also has a 1.896:1 aspect ratio.
[Side Crop]: The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the central part of the image fits within the
screen.
Original 4K or 2K image
(1.896:1)
[Letterbox] setting [Squeeze] setting [Side Crop] setting
[BT. 709]: Converts to a gamma curve based on the ITU-R BT.709
standard.
[Wide DR]: Converts to a gamma curve with a wide dynamic range.
[DCI]: Converts to a gamma curve suitable for display on a monitor
with a gamma of 2.6. Available from the MON. terminals only.
Not available when [~ Camera Setup] > [Color Space] is set
to [BT. 2020].
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[MON. 1 & 2]
[Select]
[Rec. 709]
149
Connecting to an External Monitor
2 Select [MON. 2] and then press SET.
• The video output from the MON. 2 terminal will be ACESproxy10-compliant.
• Because this setting takes priority, the [ 4K/2K/MXF] > [MON. 1 & 2] > [LUT] setting will not be
available.
Using the HD/SD SDI Terminal
The digital signal output from the HD/SD SDI terminal includes the video
signal, audio signal and time code signal. If necessary, perform the
following procedure to change the output to HD or SD*. Turning the
output off will conserve the camera’s power.
* Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
1 Open the [Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) > [HD/SD SDI] > [Output]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
• If you selected [SD], you can select the SD resizing method (A 150).
• If necessary, adjust the scan mode and resizing method with the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [HD/SD SDI] >
[Scan Mode] and [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Resize MXF Output] settings. Depending on the video
configuration, the scan mode may be set automatically.
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor
(A 151).
NOTES
• When you output from the HD/SD SDI terminal video in HD that was shot with Canon Log gamma, you can
apply a LUT (A 148).
Using the HDMI OUT Terminal
The HDMI
TM
OUT terminal also offers a digital connection and outputs both a video and audio signal. The output
signal will automatically switch to HD or SD* depending on the capability of the external monitor. You can select
the resizing method (A 63) when the camera outputs HD video during 4K or 2K mode.
* Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
NOTES
• Correct operation cannot be guaranteed when connecting the camera to DVI monitors.
• Video may not be output correctly depending on the monitor. In such case, use another terminal.
• The HDMI OUT terminal is output only. Do not connect the camera to another device’s output terminal using
the HDMI OUT terminal as this will cause a malfunction.
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor
(A 151).
• You can select the SD resizing method (A 150).
Operating modes:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
[HD/SD SDI]
[Output]
[HD]
Connecting to an External Monitor
150
Using the SYNC OUT Terminal
In addition to its function as a synchronization signal output terminal, you
can use the SYNC OUT terminal also as a terminal for analog video signal
output. You can output an HD component video luminance signal or a
down-converted SD composite video signal*.
* Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
1 Open the [Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in
mode) > [SYNC OUT] > [Output]
2 Select [HD-Y] or [Composite] and then press SET.
• If you selected [HD-Y] (HD component video, luminance signal), no more settings are necessary. If you
selected [Composite] (SD analog composite signal), you can select the SD resizing method with the
following procedure.
• If necessary, adjust the scan mode with the [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in
mode) > [SYNC OUT] > [Scan Mode] setting. You can adjust the scan mode only when [¤
TC/UB Setup] > [Time Code] > [24P TC/Sync] is set to [Normal] and the recording mode is set to RAW,
12-bit or 10-bit.
NOTES
• When you play back a clip on a monitor with a 4:3 aspect ratio, the monitor will switch automatically to
widescreen mode if it is compatible with the Video ID-1 or WSS system.
• If necessary, you can superimpose the onscreen displays on the video displayed on the external monitor
(A 151).
Selecting the Resizing Method for SD Video
When HD video with a 16:9 aspect ratio is converted and output from the
HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SYNC OUT terminal as SD
video with a 4:3 aspect ratio, you can choose how it appears on the
external monitor.
1 Open the [Resize SD Output] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in
mode) > [HD/SD Output] > [Resize SD Output]
2 Select the desired option and then press SET.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
mode:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
mode:
[¢ Video Setup]
[SYNC OUT]
[Output]
[Composite]
mode:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
mode:
[¢ Video Setup]
[HD/SD Output]
[Resize SD Output]
[Squeeze]
151
Connecting to an External Monitor
Options
Superimposing Onscreen Displays to Appear on an
External Monitor
You can choose to superimpose onscreen displays on the video output
from the HD/SD SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal or SYNC OUT terminal.
Doing so will display the onscreen displays on an external monitor. You
must set this function separately for HD and SD output. This setting will
not affect your recordings.
1 Open the [HD Onscreen Disp.] or [SD Onscreen Disp.] submenu.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in
mode) > [HD/SD Output] > [HD Onscreen Disp.] or [SD Onscreen
Disp.]
2 Select [On] and then press SET.
• T appears on the upper right of the screen (when [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [Custom Display 2] >
[Output Display] is set to [On]).
NOTES
• Onscreen displays will not appear on an external monitor for SD output if [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] (in
mode) or [¢ Video Setup] (in mode) > [Resize SD Output] is set to [Side Crop].
• If you set an assignable button to [Onscreen Display] (A 111), you can press the button to turn on and off the
superimposing of onscreen displays on video output from the camera’s terminals (simultaneously for HD and
SD video).
[Letterbox]: The picture is reduced in size while maintaining the aspect ratio
and black letterbox bars are added to the top and bottom of
the image so that the picture has a 4:3 aspect ratio.
[Squeeze]: The image is squeezed from the left and right so that the entire
image fits within the screen. The image will appear normal if the
external monitor also has a 16:9 aspect ratio.
[Side Crop]: The left and right sides of the image are cropped so that the
central part of the image fits within the screen.
Original image (16:9) [Letterbox] setting [Squeeze] setting [Side Crop] setting
Operating modes:
mode:
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup]
mode:
[¢ Video Setup]
[
HD/SD Output]
[HD Onscreen Disp.]
[SD Onscreen Disp.]
[Off]
Developing RAW Clips
152
Developing RAW Clips
Use the Cinema RAW Development software to develop RAW clips recorded on an external recorder
connected to the camera’s 3G-SDI terminals. After you develop the clips and export them to a full-quality
standard file type such as DPX, they will be ready for color grading. Visit your local Canon Web site to download
the software and check the system requirements and latest information on it. Refer to the instruction manual
(PDF file) included with the software for details on its use.
The following procedures for Windows systems are written based on a computer running Windows 7. The
procedure may be different for other versions. For details see the Help modules of the operating system.
Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development (Windows)
Installing Cinema RAW Development
1 Double-click crdw-*****.zip, the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site, to decompress it.
•The folder crdw-***** will be created that contains the file crdw***.exe.
2 Select your area.
3 Select your country/region and then click Next.
• If you selected Asia or Oceania in step 2, skip to step 5.
4 Select the language to be displayed during installation.
5 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications, exit other applications and then click OK.
• The software’s license agreement appears.
6 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation.
• If you do not select Yes, you cannot install the software.
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.
7 Click Next and then click Finish.
Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development
1From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Cinema RAW Development > Uninstall
Cinema RAW Development.
• A confirmation screen appears.
2 Click OK to begin uninstalling the software.
• When the software has been uninstalled, The software has been successfully uninstalled appears.
3 Click OK.
Installing and Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development (Mac OS)
Installing Cinema RAW Development
1 Double-click crdm-*****.dmg.gz, the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site, to decompress it.
• The file crdm-*****.dmg will be created.
2 Double-click crdm-*****.dmg.
•The crdm*** icon will appear on the desktop.
3 Double-click crdm*** and then double-click CRDInstaller.
4 Select your area.
5 Select your country/region and then click Next.
Operating modes:
153
Developing RAW Clips
6 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications, exit other applications and then click OK.
• The software’s license agreement appears.
7 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation.
• If you do not select Yes , you cannot install the software.
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.
8Click Next and then click Finish.
Uninstalling Cinema RAW Development
1From Applications, open Canon Utilities.
2Move Cinema RAW Development to Tras h.
Viewing the Software Instruction Manual
For details on using the software, refer to the instruction manual (PDF file). The instruction manual is installed with
the software.
Windows:
1From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Cinema RAW Development > Cinema
RAW Development Instruction Manual.
2 Select the language of the instruction manual to view.
Mac OS:
1From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Cinema RAW Development > Manual.
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.
NOTES
• You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Cinema RAW Development software and then
selecting
Help > View Instruction Manual.
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
154
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
Use Canon XF Utility to save clips or one of the Canon XF plugins* to import clips into non-linear editing (NLE)
software. Canon XF Utility and the Canon XF plugins are available for free download from your local Canon Web
site. Refer to the Web site for the system requirements and the latest information about the software and plugins.
For details about using the software, refer to the respective instruction manual (PDF file).
* Plugins are available for NLE software by Avid and Apple.
Canon XF Utility: Browser for transferring clips to a computer and playing back, checking and
managing clips.
Plugins for non-linear editing (NLE) software: The plugins allow you to transfer clips from a computer
or a CF card (connected via USB reader to a computer) to the NLE software. The following plugins are
available.
- Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access (Windows or Mac OS)
- Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access (Windows or Mac OS)
- Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro (Mac OS)
- Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X (Mac OS)
Installing Canon XF Utility (Windows)
The following procedures apply to computers running Windows 7. The procedures may be different for other
versions. For details see the Help modules of the operating system.
1 Double-click the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site, to decompress it.
• The file is xuw-*****.zip (for Canon XF Utility) or xpmw-*****.zip (for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access
and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access).
• The rest of the explanation refers only to Canon XF Utility but the procedure is similar for the Canon XF
plugins.
•The folder xuw-***** will be created that contains the file xuw***.exe.
2Double-click xuw***.exe.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to select your area (continent), country/region and language.
• Available options will vary depending on your country/region.
4 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications, exit other applications and then
click OK.
• The software’s license agreement appears.
5 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation.
• If you do not select Yes, you cannot install the software.
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.
6 Click Next and then click Finish.
Uninstalling Canon XF Utility (Windows)
1From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Uninstall Canon XF
Utility.
• A confirmation screen appears.
2 Click Yes to begin uninstalling the software.
• When the software has been uninstalled, The software has been successfully uninstalled appears.
Operating modes:
155
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
3Click OK.
Uninstalling the Plugins (Windows)
1 In the Control Panel, open Programs and Features or Add or Remove Programs.
• A list of installed programs appears.
2 Select Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access, Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access or Canon
XF MPEG2 Decoder.
3Click Uninstall or Uninstall/Change.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions.
Uninstalling the Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF
Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access (Windows)
1From the Start menu, open All Programs > Canon Utilities > Desired plugin > Uninstall Canon XF Plugin
for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual or Uninstall Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access
Instruction Manual.
2 When the confirmation screen appears, click Yes and then click OK.
Installing Canon XF Utility (Mac OS)
1 Double-click the file that you downloaded from the Canon Web site, to decompress it.
• The downloaded file is xum-*****.dmg.gz (for Canon XF Utility), xpmm-*****.dmg.gz (for Canon XF Plugin
for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access) or xpfm-*****.dmg.gz (for Canon XF
Plugin for Final Cut Pro and Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X). The rest of the explanation refers only to
Canon XF Utility but the procedure is similar for the Canon XF plugins.
•The file xum-*****.dmg will be created.
2 Double-click xum-*****.dmg.
•The xum*** icon will appear on the desktop.
3 Double-click xum*** and then double-click XUMInstaller.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to select your area (continent), country/region and language.
• Available options will vary depending on your country/region.
5 After the message appears prompting you to exit other applications, exit other applications and then click OK.
• The software’s license agreement appears.
6 Read the license agreement and click Yes to begin the installation.
• If you do not select Yes , you cannot install the software.
• When the installation has completed, Installation has completed successfully appears.
7Click Next and then click Finish.
Uninstalling the Software (Mac OS)
Drag and drop the file or folder corresponding to the software that you want to uninstall to Trash.
Canon XF Utility
/Applications/Canon Utilities/Canon XF Utility
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/RAD/Plugins/CanonXF.RADPlug
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
156
Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/MIO/RADPlugins/CanonXF64.RADPlug
Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access
/Library/Application Support/Avid/AVX2_Plug-ins/AMA/MVP_CanonXF.avx
Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access
/Library/Application Support/ProApps/Avid/AVX2_Plug_ins/AMA/MVP_CanonXF64.avx
Canon XF MPEG2 Decoder
/Library/QuickTime/XFMpeg2Dec.component
Instructions for the plugins
/Applications/Canon Utilities/<
desired plugin
>
•For <
desired plugin
>, select Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access, Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media
Access, Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro or Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X.
Viewing the Software Instruction Manuals
For details on using the software, refer to the instruction manual (PDF file) of each module. The instruction
manuals are installed with the software. The following procedures for computers running Windows apply to
Windows 7. The procedures may be different for other versions. For details see the Help modules of the
operating system.
Viewing the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual
Windows:
1From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Canon XF Utility
Instruction Manual.
2 Select the language of the instruction manual to view.
Mac OS:
1From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Canon XF Utility > Manual.
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.
You can also view the instruction manual by starting the Canon XF Utility software and then selecting Help >
View Instruction Manual.
Viewing the Plugin Instructions
Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access
(Windows):
1From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > Desired plugin > Canon XF Plugin for Avid
Media Access Instruction Manual or Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access Instruction Manual.
2 Select the desired language.
Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro and Canon XF Plugin for Final Cut Pro X (Mac OS):
1From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Desired plugin > Manual.
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.
157
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
Instructions for Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access and Canon XF Plugin 64 for Avid Media Access
(Mac OS):
1From Applications, open Canon Utilities > Desired plugin > Manual.
2 Open the folder of the language and double-click the PDF file.
Saving MXF Clips to a Computer
158
7
159
Photos
Taking Photos
You can take photos when the camera is in mode or you can capture a photo from an MXF clip when the
camera is in mode. Photos are saved onto the SD card. In mode, photo size is 1920x1080* or
1920x540**. In mode, photo size depends on the resolution setting of the clip that the photo is captured
from. If the clip is 1920x1080 or 1440x1080, the photo size is 1920x1080. If the clip is 1280x720, the photo size
is 1280x720.
* At this size, the camera can save approximately 670 photos on a 1 GB SD card. Also, during 4K and 2K modes, if [ 4K/2K/MXF
Setup] > [Resize MXF Output] is set to [Letterbox], the picture angle will differ.
**Only when [ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [4K (4096/3840)] > [Mode] is set to [4K1K RAW].
Taking Photos in CAMERA Mode
You can take a photo while the camera is recording a clip or is in record pause mode. If a custom picture file is
selected in advance, it will be recorded with the photo (A 114). To take a photo, set an assignable button to
[Photo] in advance.
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 111).
2 Press the assignable button to take a photo.
• * and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen.
• If a custom picture file is selected, it will be recorded with the photo.
• The SD card access indicator will flash as the photo is being recorded.
NOTES
• Photo recording is disabled while Wi-Fi communication is turned on ([w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi Remote]
> [Select] is set to a setting other than [Off]).
Capturing Photos in MEDIA Mode
You can capture a photo from an MXF clip during playback pause. To capture a photo, set an assignable button
to [Photo] in advance.
1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 111).
2 Select the desired MXF clip and press the Ò button to start playback.
3 Pause the playback at the point you want to capture.
4 Press the assignable button to capture a photo.
• The screen will momentarily turn black as if a camera shutter had released.
• * and the number of available photos appear on the upper right of the screen.
• The SD card access indicator will flash as the photo is being recorded.
5 Press the Ñ button to stop playback.
Operating modes:
Operating modes:
Taking Photos
160
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in
permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not remove the SD card.
NOTES
• If the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing, you will not be able to record a photo. Change the
position of the LOCK switch in advance.
• Even if [Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [Scan Reverse Rec] is set to a setting other than [Off],
photos will not be inverted.
161
Photo Playback
Photo Playback
You can view the photos that you took with the camera.
Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen
Display the [Photos] index screen to view photos.
1 Set the Q switch to MEDIA.
• The camera switches to mode and the clip index screen
appears.
2 Press the INDEX button.
• The index screen selection menu appears.
3 Select [Photo Index] and then press SET.
• The [Photos] index screen appears.
• After you are finished viewing photos, press the INDEX button to
return to the clip index screen.
Viewing Photos
1 Move the orange selection frame to the desired photo.
2 Press the Ò button to view the photo.
• The photo playback screen appears and the selected photo is
displayed.
•Use the Ú/Ù buttons or push the joystick left/right to switch to
the previous/next photo.
• Press the DISP. button to hide/show the onscreen displays.
• Press the Ñ button to return to the [Photos] index screen.
IMPORTANT
• Observe the following precautions while the SD card access indicator is flashing. Failure to do so may result in
permanent data loss.
- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camera.
- Do not remove the SD card.
NOTES
• The following photos may not be displayed correctly.
- Photos not recorded with this camera.
- Photos created or edited on a computer.
- Photos whose file names have been changed.
Operating modes:
Photo Operations
162
Photo Operations
You can use the photo menu to delete a photo, protect or unprotect a photo, or copy a custom picture file
embedded in a photo. You can display the photo menu from the [Photos] index screen or photo playback
screen.
Using the Photo Menu
1 From the [Photos] index screen, select a photo and then press SET.
• If you are viewing a photo, simply press SET.
• The photo menu appears. Available functions depend on the photo’s settings.
2 Select the desired function and then press SET.
Deleting Photos
You can delete a photo you no longer need. When you do so, however, the custom picture file embedded in it
will also be deleted. Photos can be deleted one at a time from the photo playback screen or [Photos] index
screen.
Deleting a Photo from the Playback Screen
1 Display the photo to be deleted (A 161).
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.
3 Select [Delete] and then press SET.
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• The selected photo is deleted and the next photo is displayed.
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also deleted.
5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Deleting a Photo from the Index Screen
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 161).
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be deleted.
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.
4 Select [Delete] and then press SET.
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• The selected photo is deleted.
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also deleted.
6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Operating modes:
163
Photo Operations
Deleting All Photos
1 Display the [Photos] index screen or a photo (A 161).
2 Open the [Delete All Photos] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Delete All Photos]
3 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• All of the photos on the SD card, except for protected ones, will be deleted.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• While the photos are being deleted, you can press SET to cancel.
4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when deleting photos. Deleted photos cannot be recovered.
Protecting Photos
You can protect photos to prevent accidental erasure. The custom picture file embedded in such a photo is also
protected. Photos can be protected from the photo playback screen or [Photos] index screen.
Protecting a Photo from the Playback Screen
1 Display the photo to be protected (A 161).
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.
3 Select [Protect] and then press SET.
• To remove protection settings from a protected photo, select [Unprotect] instead.
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.
4 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• The selected photo is protected and i appears on the lower left of the screen.
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also protected.
Protecting a Photo from the Index Screen
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 161).
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo to be protected.
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.
4 Select [Protect] and then press SET.
• To remove protection settings from a protected photo, select [Unprotect] instead.
• The screen prompts you to confirm the operation.
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The selected photo is protected and i appears next to the photo’s thumbnail.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
• If a custom picture file is embedded in the photo, it is also protected.
Operating modes:
[w Other Functions]
[Delete All Photos]
Photo Operations
164
IMPORTANT
• Initializing an SD card will permanently erase all the data it contains, including protected photos and custom
picture files.
Copying Custom Picture Files
You can copy to the camera a custom picture file embedded in a photo. Custom picture files can be copied from
the photo playback screen or [Photos] index screen.
Copying a File from the Playback Screen
1 Display the photo with the custom picture file to be copied (A 161).
2 Press SET to open the photo menu.
3 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.
•The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camera.
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.
• You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to display the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]
screens.
4 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot and then press SET.
5 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The custom picture file embedded in the selected photo is copied, overwriting the file in that slot.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
Copying a File from the Index Screen
1 Open the [Photos] Index Screen (A 161).
2 Move the orange selection frame to the photo with the custom picture file to be copied.
3 Press SET to open the photo menu.
4 Select [Copy / File] and then press SET.
•The [/ Data 1/3] screen appears with the orange selection frame indicating a file slot in the camera.
• Alternatively, you can press the CUSTOM PICTURE button.
• You can push the joystick up/down or turn the SELECT dial to display the [/ Data 2/3] and [/ Data 3/3]
screens.
5 Push the joystick left/right to select the desired file slot and then press SET.
6 Select [OK] and then press SET.
• The custom picture file embedded in the selected photo is copied, overwriting the file in that slot.
• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.
7 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.
NOTES
• You cannot copy the custom picture file to a file slot with a protected file.
• By default, file slots [C8] and [C9] are protected.
Operating modes:
165
Photo Operations
Photo Numbering
Photos are automatically assigned consecutive numbers from 0101 to
9900, and stored on the SD card in folders containing up to 100 photos.
Folders are numbered from 101 to 998. You can select the photo
numbering method to be used.
The photo number indicates the name and location of the file on the SD
card. For example, a photo numbered 101-0107 is located in the
“DCIM\101CANON” folder as the file “IMG_0107.jpg”.
1 Open the [Photo Numbering] submenu.
[w Other Functions] > [Photo Numbering]
2 Select the desired option and the press SET.
Options
NOTES
• If you select [Continu.] and the SD card you insert already contains a photo with a larger number, a new photo
will be assigned a number one higher than that of the last photo on the SD card.
• We recommend using the [Continu.] setting.
Operating modes:
[Reset]: Photo numbers will restart from 101-0101 every time you insert a new SD card. If an SD card already
contains photos, photo numbers will continue from the number following that of the last photo on the SD
card.
[Continu.]: Photo numbers will continue from the number following that of the last photo recorded with the
camera.
[w Other Functions]
[Photo Numbering]
[Continu.]
Photo Operations
166
8
167
Additional Information
Menu Options
For details about how to select an item, refer to
Using the Menus
(A 29). For details about each function, see
the reference page. Menu items without a reference page are explained after the tables. Setting options in
boldface indicate default values. Menu items not available appear grayed out.
To skip directly to the page of a specific menu:
[~ Camera Setup] menu A 167
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] menu A 167
[¢ Video Setup] menu A 170
[¡ Audio Setup] menu A 171
[£ LCD/VF Setup] menu A 171
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu A 174
[¤ User Bit Setup] menu A 174
[w Other Functions] menu A 175
[¥My Menu] customized menu A 177
[~ Camera Setup] menu ( mode only)
* The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.
[ 4K/2K/MXF Setup] menu ( mode only)
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[ISO/Gain] [Select] [ISO], [Gain]
70
[Extended Range] [On], [Off]
[ISO Increment] [1 stop], [1/3 stop]
[Gain] [Normal], [Fine]
2 [Iris] [Iris Increment] [1/2 stop], [1/3 stop], [Fine]
74
[Zoom-Iris Correct.] [On], [Off]
[Shutter] [Mode] [Speed], [Angle], [Clear Scan], [Slow], [Off]
67
[Shutter Increment] [1/3 stop], [1/4 stop]
[Color Space] [BT. 709], [DCI-P3+], [C. Gamut], [BT. 2020] 144
[/ CINEMA Locked] [On], [Off] 58
[ABB] [Cancel], [OK] 48
[Color Bars] [Enable] [On], [Off]
99
[Type] [SMPTE], [EBU]*, [ARIB]
2 [Periph. Illum. Corr.] [On], [Off] 34
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[System Priority] [4K], [2K], [MXF] 60
[System Frequency] [59.94 Hz], [50.00 Hz]
1
, [24.00 Hz] 60
Menu Options
168
[4K (4096/3840)] [Mode]
2
[RAW], [HRAW], [4K1K RAW] 60
[Resolution]
2
When [Mode] is set to [RAW]:
[4096x2160], [3840x2160]
When [Mode] is set to [HRAW]:
[4096x1080], [3840x1080]
When [Mode] is set to [4K1K RAW]:
[4096x1080]
62
[Frame Rate]
2
For 59.94 Hz recordings:
[59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[50.00P], [25.00P]
For 24.00 Hz recordings, the frame rate is set to [24.00P] and cannot be
changed.
62
[2K (2048/1920)] [Mode]
3
[ 12-bit], [ 10-bit], [ 10-bit]
8
60
[Resolution]
3
[2048x1080], [1920x1080] 62
[Frame Rate]
3
For 59.94 Hz recordings:
[59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[50.00P], [25.00P]
For 24.00 Hz recordings, the frame rate is set to [24.00P] and cannot be
changed.
62
[MXF] [Bit Rate/Resolution]
4
[50 Mbps 1920x1080], [50 Mbps 1280x720], [35 Mbps 1920x1080],
[35 Mbps 1280x720], [25 Mbps 1440x1080]
64
[Frame Rate]
4, 5, 6
For 59.94 Hz recordings:
[59.94i], [59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[50.00i], [50.00P], [25.00P]
For 24.00 Hz recordings, the frame rate is set to [24.00P] and cannot be
changed.
62
[Resize MXF Output]
7
[Letterbox], [Squeeze], [Side Crop] 63
[Special Rec] [Interval Rec], [Frame Rec], [Pre Rec]
5
, [Slow & Fast Motion], [Off] 105
[Interval Rec] [Interval] [1 sec] to [10 sec], [15 sec], [20 sec], [30 sec], [40 sec], [50 sec],
[1 min] to [10 min]
105
[Rec Frames] During 4K or 2K mode, or MXF mode when [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94i],
[29.97P], [23.98P] or [24.00P]:
1, 3, 6, 9
During MXF mode when [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94P], [50.00i], [50.00P]
or [25.00P]:
2, 6 ,12
105
[Frame Rec] [Rec Frames] During 4K or 2K mode, or MXF mode when [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94i],
[29.97P], [23.98P] or [24.00P]:
1, 3, 6, 9
During MXF mode when [Frame Rate] is set to [59.94P], [50.00i], [50.00P]
or [25.00P]:
2, 6 ,12
106
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
169
Menu Options
[S&F Frame Rate] During 4K mode when [Mode] is set to [RAW], or 2K mode when [Mode] is
set to [ 12-bit] or [ 10-bit]:
For 59.94 Hz and 24.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [30], [32] to [60]* ([24])
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [25], [26] to [50]* ([24])
During 4K mode when [Mode] is set to [HRAW] / [4K1K RAW], or 2K mode
when [Mode] is set to [ 10-bit]:
For 59.94 Hz and 24.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [60], [62] to [120]* ([24])
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [50], [52] to [100]* ([24])
During MXF mode when [Bit Rate/Resolution] is set to an option with 1080
vertical resolution:
For 59.94 Hz and 24.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [30]
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [25]
During MXF mode when [Bit Rate/Resolution] is set to an option with 720
vertical resolution:
For 59.94 Hz and 24.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [60], ([30])
For 50.00 Hz recordings:
[1] to [50], ([25])
* This range is in 2 fps increments. When the shooting frame
rate appears in brackets on the screen, this indicates that
both 3G-SDI terminals are required for output.
108
[Clip Name] [Title Prefix] Two characters, each:
[A] to [Z], [0] to [9] ([AA])
–
[Number Setting] [Set], [Reset] ([0001]) –
[Metadata] [Setting] [Remote], [SD Card]
97
[User Memo] [Off], list of user memo files available on the SD card
[Country Code] Letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9, plus sign (+), minus sign (-), colon (:),
space
–[Organization]
[User Code]
[3G-SDI Output]
7
[On], [Off] 41
[MON. 1 & 2]
7
[Output] [On], [Off] 147
[LUT] [On], [Off]
148
[Select] [BT. 709], [Wide DR], [DCI]
[ACESPX10] [Off], [MON. 2] 148
[Resolution] [2048x1080], [1920x1080] 147
[Resize Output] [Letterbox], [Squeeze], [Side Crop] 147
[Scan Mode]
6
[P], [PsF] 147
[MON. 1]
7
[Peaking Gain] [Off], [1] to [15] ([10]) 80
[HD/SD SDI] [Output] [HD], [SD]
8
, [Off]
149
[LUT] [On], [Off]
[Select] [BT. 709], [Wide DR]
[Scan Mode] [P], [PsF]
[SYNC OUT] [Output] [HD-Y], [HD Sync], [Blk Burst]
8
, [Composite]
8
, [Off]
150
[Scan Mode] [P], [PsF]
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
Menu Options
170
1
The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.
2
Available during 4K mode only.
3
Available during 2K mode only.
4
Available options depend on the system priority and system frequency settings.
5
Available during MXF mode only.
6
Available options depend on the system frequency and resolution settings.
7
Available during 4K and 2K modes only.
8
Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
[Clip Name] settings
[Title Prefix]: Determines the first 2 characters of the clip name. Combined with the [Number Setting] setting,
this constitutes the 6-character clip name.
[Number Setting]: Determines the last 4 digits of the clip name. Combined with the [Title Prefix] setting, this
constitutes the 6-character clip name. Select [Set] to assign a desired number to the first clip you record or
select [Reset] to reset the number to [0001].
The numerals increase every time a clip is recorded.
[Country Code]: This identifier is the country code defined by ISO-3166-1 and is to be entered starting from
the left.
[Organization]: This identifier represents the organization that owns or operates the camera and can be
obtained by registering with the SMPTE Registration Authority. If the organization is not registered, enter [0000].
[User Code]: This identifier designates the user. Leave this blank if [Organization] is set to [0000].
[Rec Command]: When you connect the camera to another device using the 3G-SDI terminals (during 4K and
2K modes) or HD/SD SDI terminal (during MXF mode), if you start or stop recording with the camera, the other
device will also start or stop recording.
[¢ Video Setup] menu ( mode only )
1
The default value depends on the country/region of purchase.
2
Not available for 24.00 Hz recordings.
[HD/SD Output] [HD Onscreen Disp.] [On], [Off] 151
[Zebra HD Output] [On], [Off] 83
[SD Onscreen Disp.] [On], [Off] 151
[Resize SD Output]
8
[Letterbox], [Squeeze], [Side Crop] 150
[Rec Command] [On], [Off] –
[Set CF Card Slot] [Relay Rec] [On], [Off]
46
[Double Slot Rec] [On], [Off]
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[System Frequency] [59.94 Hz], [50.00 Hz]
1
, [24.00 Hz] 60,
64
[HD/SD SDI] [Output] [HD], [SD]
2
, [Off]
149
[Scan Mode] [P], [PsF]
[SYNC OUT] [Output] [HD-Y], [HD Sync], [Blk Burst]
2
, [Composite]
2
, [Off]
150
[Scan Mode] [P], [PsF]
[HD/SD Output] [HD Onscreen Disp.] [On], [Off] 151
[SD Onscreen Disp.] [On], [Off] 151
[Resize SD Output]
2
[Letterbox], [Squeeze], [Side Crop] 150
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
171
Menu Options
[¡ Audio Setup] menu
* Not available in the [Photos] index screen.
[£ LCD/VF Setup] menu
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[Audio Input] [XLR Rec Channel] [CH1], [CH1/CH2] Ü – 93
[XLR1 Mic Trimming] [+12 dB], [+6 dB], [0 dB], [-6 dB], [-12 dB]
Ü – 95
[XLR2 Mic Trimming]
[XLR1 Mic Att.] [On], [Off]
Ü – 95
[XLR2 Mic Att.]
[XLR ALC Link] [Linked], [Separated] Ü – 94
[Limiter] [On], [Off]
Ü –
94,
95
[1 kHz Tone] [-12 dB], [-18 dB], [-20 dB], [Off] Ü – 99
[MIC Mode] [Automatic], [Manual] Ü –
95
[MIC Level] 0 to 99 (50) Ü –
[MIC Att.] [On], [Off] Ü – 96
[Audio Output] [Channel] [CH1/CH2], [CH1/CH1], [CH2/CH2], [All/All] Ü Ü* 96
[Headphone Volume] [Off], 1 to 15 (8) Ü Ü* 131
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[LCD Setup] [Brightness] -99 to 99 (±0) Ü Ü
38
[Contrast] -99 to 99 (±0) Ü Ü
[Color] -20 to 20 (±0) Ü Ü
[Sharpness] 1 to 4 (2) Ü Ü
[Backlight] [Normal], [Bright] Ü Ü
[VF Setup] [Brightness] -99 to 99 (±0) Ü Ü
38
[Contrast] -99 to 99 (±0) Ü Ü
[Color] -20 to 20 (±0) Ü Ü
[Sharpness] 1 to 4 (2) Ü Ü
[Backlight] [Normal], [Bright] Ü Ü
[LCD/VF B&W] [On], [Off] Ü Ü 38
[LCD/VF Simul.] [On], [Off] Ü Ü 37
[View Assist.] [On], [Off] Ü – 58
[Peaking]
1
[On], [Off] Ü –
80
[Select]
1
[Peaking 1], [Peaking 2] Ü –
[Peaking 1] [Color]
1
[White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue] Ü –
[Gain] [Off], 1 to 15 (8) Ü –
[Frequency] 1 to 4 (2) Ü –
[Peaking 2]
1
[Color]
1
[White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue] Ü –
[Gain] [Off], 1 to 15 (15) Ü –
[Frequency] 1 to 4 (1) Ü –
Menu Options
172
[Zebra]
1
[On], [Off] Ü –
83
[Select]
1
[Zebra 1], [Zebra 2], [Zebra 1&2] Ü –
[Zebra 1 Level]
1
[70 ±5%], [75 ±5%], [80 ±5%], [85 ±5%],
[90 ±5%], [95 ±5%]
Ü –
[Zebra 2 Level]
1
[70%], [75%], [80%], [85%], [90%], [95%],
[100%]
Ü –
[Markers]
1
[Enable] [On], [Off] Ü –
82
[Center] [White], [Gray], [Off] Ü –
[Horizontal] [White], [Gray], [Off] Ü –
[Grid] [White], [Gray], [Off] Ü –
[Safety Zone] [White], [Gray], [Off] Ü –
[Safety Zone Area] [80%], [90%], [92.5%], [95%] Ü –
[Aspect Marker] [White], [Gray], [Off] Ü –
[Aspect Ratio] [4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [1.66:1], [1.75:1],
[1.85:1], [2.35:1]
Ü –
[Audio Level] [On], [Off] – Ü
2
–
[Custom Display 1] [Custom Picture] [On], [Off] Ü –
–
2 [Focal Length] [On], [Off] Ü –
[ND Filter] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Key Lock] [On], [Off] Ü –
[White Balance] [On], [Off] Ü –
2 [Iris] [On], [Off] Ü –
[ISO/Gain] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Shutter] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Peaking] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Magnification] [On], [Off] Ü –
[View Assist.] [On], [Off] Ü –
2 [Lens] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Custom Display 2] [Remaining Battery] [Warning], [Normal], [Off] Ü –
–
[Remaining Rec Time] [Warning], [Normal], [Off] Ü –
[Rec Mode] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Genlock] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Time Code] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Interval Counter] [On], [Off] Ü –
[SD Card Status] [Warning], [Normal], [Off] Ü –
[Temperature/Fan] [On], [Off] Ü –
[4K/2K Mode] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Bit Rate] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Resolution] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Frame Rate] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Character Rec] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Output Display] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Rec Command] [On], [Off] Ü –
[User Memo] [On], [Off] Ü –
[User Bit] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Audio Output CH] [On], [Off] Ü –
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
173
Menu Options
1
Setting applies also to the MON. 1 terminal output.
2
Not available in the [Photos] index screen or photo playback screen.
[Audio Level]: Displays the audio level meter when set to [On].
[Custom Display 1] settings
[Custom Picture]: Displays the custom picture icon (/) when set to [On], indicating that a custom picture
profile will be recorded with a clip.
2 [Focal Length]: Displays the current focal length of an attached EF lens when set to [On].
[ND Filter]: Displays the ND filter indicator when set to [On].
[Key Lock]: Displays the key lock icon (C) when set to [On].
[White Balance]: Displays the white balance indicator when set to [On].
2 [Iris]: Displays the aperture setting when set to [On].
[ISO/Gain]: Displays the ISO speed or gain setting when set to [On].
[Shutter]: Displays the shutter speed setting when set to [On].
[Peaking]: Displays the peaking icon (J or K) when set to [On].
[Magnification]: Displays the screen magnification icon (^) when set to [On], indicating that the image on
the screen is being magnified.
[View Assist.]: Displays the view assistance icon (O) when set to [On].
2 [Lens]: Displays the lens warning icon ( ) when set to [On], indicating that the attached lens cannot
communicate with the camera.
[Custom Display 2] settings
[Remaining Battery]: Controls when the remaining battery indicator appears.
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.
[Remaining Rec Time]: Displays the remaining recording time.
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.
[Rec Mode]: Displays the recording operation indicator ([STBY`] in record pause mode, for example) when
set to [On].
[Genlock]: Displays the Genlock synchronization icon (U) when set to [On].
[Time Code]: Displays the time code when set to [On].
[Interval Counter]: Displays the countdown during interval recording mode when set to [On].
[SD Card Status]: Controls when the SD card status indicator appears.
[Warning]: Appears only when there is a warning.
[Normal]: Always appears on the screen.
[Temperature/Fan]: Displays the temperature warning icon ( ) and the cooling fan icon ( ) when set to
[On]. The temperature warning icon indicates that the camera’s internal temperature has become high.
[4K/2K Mode]: Displays the recording mode onscreen display for 4K mode ([RAW] or [HRAW]) or 2K mode
( or , plus bit depth) when set to [On].
[Custom Display 2] [Audio Level] [On], [Off] Ü –
–[Wi-Fi] [On], [Off] Ü –
[Date/Time] [Date/Time], [Time], [Date], [Off] Ü –
[Metadata Display] [Date/Time] [On], [Off] – Ü
2
–
[Camera Data] [On], [Off] – Ü
2
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
Menu Options
174
[Bit Rate]: Displays the bit rate when set to [On].
[Resolution]: Displays the resolution when set to [On].
[Frame Rate]: Displays the frame rate when set to [On].
[Character Rec]: Displays the character recording warning icon (S) when set to [On], indicating that the
onscreen displays will be recorded on the clip.
[Output Display]: Displays the output display warning icon (T) when set to [On], indicating that the
onscreen displays will be output to an external monitor.
[Rec Command]: Displays the status of the recording command that is being output when [ 4K/2K/MXF
Setup] > [Rec Command] is set to [On].
[User Memo]: Displays the user memo icon (Q) when set to [On], indicating that a user memo will be
recorded with a clip.
[User Bit]: Displays the user bit when set to [On].
[Audio Output CH]: Displays the audio output channel when set to [On].
[Audio Level]: Displays the audio level indicator and, if activated, the audio peak limiter icon (æ) when set to [On].
[Wi-Fi]: Displays the Wi-Fi icon („) when set to [On].
[Date/Time]: Displays the date and/or time.
[Metadata Display]: Displays the date and time of recording and/or the camera data (shutter speed, aperture
value, gain) during playback of an MXF clip.
[¤ TC/UB Setup] menu ( mode only)
1
Available during MXF mode only.
2
When the frame rate is a setting other than 29.97P, 59.94i or 59.94P, the time code is set to [NDF] and this setting cannot be changed.
[24P TC/Sync]: Determines the frequency for time code input and output and synchronization through the
GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal (tri-level signal) when the frame rate is set to 23.98P or 24.00P.
[XF Legacy]: Synchronization mode compatible with Canon XF series camcorders. Synchronizes the time
code at a 30-frame signal and the signal from the GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal at a 59.94i or
60.00i signal. The SYNC OUT terminal outputs a 59.94i or 60.00i signal.
[Normal]: Standard synchronization mode. Synchronizes the time code at a 24-frame signal and the signal
from the GENLOCK terminal and SYNC OUT terminal at a 23.98P or 24.00P signal. The SYNC OUT terminal
outputs a 23.98P/PsF or 24.00P/PsF signal.
[¤ User Bit Setup] menu ( mode only*)
* Not available in the [Photos] index screen or photo playback screen.
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[Time Code] [Mode]
1
[Preset], [Regen.] 84
[Run]
1
[Rec Run], [Free Run] 84
[DF/NDF]
2
[DF], [NDF] 85
[Setting] [Set], [Reset] 85
[TC In/Out] [In], [Out] 89
[24P TC/Sync] [XF Legacy], [Normal] –
[User Bit] [Rec Mode] [Internal], [External] 89
[Output Mode] [Fixed], [Pulldown] 91
[Type] [Setting], [Time], [Date] 87
Menu item Setting options A
[Output Mode] [Fixed], [Pulldown] 91
175
Menu Options
[w Other Functions] menu
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[Reset] [All Settings] [Cancel], [OK] Ü Ü
–[Camera Settings] [Cancel], [OK] Ü –
[Assignable Buttons] [Cancel], [OK] Ü Ü
1
[Transfer Menu//] [Save To *] [Menu], [Menu+/] Ü Ü
125
[Load From *] [Menu], [Menu+/] Ü Ü
[Time Zone] List of world time zones.
[UTC-05:00 New York] or [UTC+01:00
Central Europe]
2
Ü Ü 27
[Set Clock] [Date/Time] – Ü Ü
27
[Date Format] [YMD], [YMD/24H], [MDY], [MDY/24H],
[DMY], [DMY/24H]
2
Ü Ü
[WFM (LCD)]
1
[Setting] [WFM], [VS], [Edge Mon.], [Off] Ü –
100
[WFM], [VS], [Off] – Ü
[Waveform Monitor] [Line], [Line+Spot], [Field], [RGB], [YPbPr] Ü Ü
100
[Gain] [1x], [2x] Ü Ü
[Vectorscope] [Spot], [Normal] Ü Ü
101
[Gain] [1x], [5x] Ü Ü
[Edge Monitor] [Type 1], [Type 2] Ü –
101
[Gain] [Off], 1 to 15 (12) Ü –
[Language !] [Deutsch], [English], [Español], [Français],
[Italiano], [Polski], [ ], [ ],
[], []
Ü Ü 28
[REMOTE Term.] [RC-V100], [Standard] Ü Ü 49
[Assign Button] [1] to [15] See footnote 3 Ü –
111
[1] to [9] – Ü
1
[Tally Lamp] [On], [Off] Ü – –
[Media Access LED] [On], [Off] Ü Ü –
[Fan] [On], [Automatic] Ü – 59
[Genlock Adjust.] -1023 to +1023 (000) Ü – –
[Rec Review] [Entire Clip], [Last 4 sec] Ü – 104
[Delete Last Clip] [Cancel], [OK] Ü – –
[Clips]
4
[Copy All Clips]
5
[Cancel], [OK] – Ü 135
[Copy $ Clips]
4
[Cancel], [OK] – Ü 135
[Delete All Clips]
5
[Cancel], [OK] – Ü 136
[Delete All $ Marks]
4
[Cancel], [OK] – Ü 135
[Photo Numbering] [Reset], [Continu.] Ü Ü
1
165
[Delete All Photos]
6
[Cancel], [OK] – Ü 163
[Add / File] [To Clip] [On], [Off]
Ü – 117
[To Photo] [On], [Off]
Menu Options
176
1
Not available in the [Photos] index screen or photo playback screen.
2
The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.
3
Setting options for [Assign Button]: [(NONE)], [ND+], [ND-], [PEAKING], [ZEBRA], [WFM], [EDGE MON.], [MAGN.], [Color Bars],
[Markers], [LCD Setup], [VF Setup], [LCD/VF B&W], [View Assist.], [LUT], [Resize MON. Output], [Resize MXF Output], [Onscreen
Display], [Add Shot Mark 1], [Add Shot Mark 2], [Add $ Mark], [Add % Mark], [Time Code], [Time Code Hold], [Headphone +],
[Headphone -], [Audio Output CH], [Audio Level], [Photo], [FUNC.], [FUNC. Shutter], [FUNC. ISO/Gain], [FUNC. WB], [S&F Frame
Rate], [My Menu], [Initialize Media], [LENS EXCHANGE], [User Setting (NONE)].
The default settings are as follows. [1]: [MAGN.], [2]: [PEAKING], [3]: [ZEBRA], [4]: [WFM], [5]: [LENS EXCHANGE], [6]: [LUT],
[7]: [MAGN.], [8]: [WFM], [9]: [EDGE MON.], [10] to [15]: [(NONE)].
4
Available in the clip index screen and [$ Mark] index screen only.
5
Available in the clip index screen only.
6
Available in the [Photos] index screen and photo playback screen only.
7
Available only when the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camera.
[Reset]: Reset various camera settings.
[All Settings]: Resets all the camera’s settings to default settings, except for the hour meter.
[Camera Settings]: Resets the white balance, iris (2 only), ISO speed, gain, shutter speed, [~ Camera
Setup] settings and custom picture settings to default settings.
[Assignable Buttons]: Resets the assignable buttons to default settings.
[Tally Lamp]: Allows you to set whether the tally lamp illuminates while recording.
[Media Access LED]: Allows you to set whether the CF card access indicators or the SD card access indicator
illuminates while the camera is accessing a CF card or SD card.
[Custom Function] [Shockless WB] [On], [Off]
Ü – 123
[Control Dial] 2 [Iris], [ISO/Gain], [Off]
3 [ISO/Gain], [Off]
[Grip Ctrl Dial]
2 [Iris], [ISO/Gain], [Off]
3 [ISO/Gain], [Off]
[Control Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal]
[Grip Ctrl Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal]
[SELECT Dial Dir.] [Reverse], [Normal]
[Retract Lens] [On], [Off]
[F. Assist. B&W] [Both], [Magnify], [Peaking], [Off]
[Magn. Add. Disp.] [Peaking], [Edge Mon.], [Off]
[3D Rec Mode] [On], [Off]
[Scan Reverse Rec] [Both], [Vertical], [Horizontal], [Off]
[Character Rec] [On], [Off]
[C START/STOP] [On], [Off]
[Reset Hour Meter] [Cancel], [OK] Ü Ü –
[Wi-Fi Remote]
7
[Set Up New] For details refer to “WFT-E6 Wireless File
Transmitter - Guide for Canon Camcorders”
(PDF file).
Ü – –
[Select]
[Edit]
[Camera Settings]
[Select User]
[User Setting]
[Initialize Media] [CF A] [Cancel], [OK]
Ü Ü
45[CF B]
[SD Card] [Complete], [Quick] Ü Ü
[Firmware] – Ü – –
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
177
Menu Options
[Genlock Adjust.]: The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the camera is initially set to 0.
This function allows you to adjust it within the range of approx. ±0.4 H (-1023 to 1023). When setting to 1000 or
more or -1000 or less, set the first field to 10 or -10, respectively.
[Delete Last Clip]: Deletes the last MXF clip you recorded. This setting option will not appear if you turned the
camera off since recording the last clip.
[Reset Hour Meter]: The camera has two “hour meters” – the first keeps track of total operation time and the
second keeps track of operation time since the last time the second hour meter was reset with this function.
[Firmware]: You can verify the current version of the camera’s firmware. This menu option is usually unavailable.
[¥My Menu] ( mode only)
Menu item Submenu Setting options A
[Edit] [Register] [Cancel], [OK] 30
[Move] [Cancel], [OK]
[Delete] [Cancel], [OK]
[Reset All] [Cancel], [OK]
Displaying the Status Screens
178
Displaying the Status Screens
You can use the status screens to check the camera’s various recording- and playback-related settings. You can
also output the status screens on an external monitor.
1 Press the STATUS button.
• The status screen most recently displayed will appear
unless you turned off the camera or changed the operating
mode. In such case, the [Camera] status screen appears in
mode and the [Assign Button 1/2] status screen
appears in mode.
2 Push the joystick up/down or use the SELECT dial to
scroll through the status screens.
3 When you are finished, press the STATUS button again
to exit the status screens.
• Alternatively, you can press the MENU or CUSTOM
PICTURE button. Doing so will exit the status screen and
open the respective menu.
,
1
2 only.
2
Does not appear in the [Photos] index screen.
3
These screens appear only after a custom picture file has been selected.
4
These screens appear only when the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter is attached to the camera and an active access
point has been activated with the [w Other Functions] > [Wi-Fi Remote] setting.
Operating modes:
Status screen Description A
[Gamma/Color Space] Displays the output settings for each terminal. Also displays the
gamma and color space settings of the video on the screen and the
video to be recorded on a CF card.
Ü – 179
[Camera] Displays settings related to recording, such as ISO speed/gain, iris
1
and shutter speed increments, peripheral illumination correction
1
and
attached lens model information
1
.
Ü – 179
[Assign Button 1/2],
[Assign Button 2/2]
Allows you to verify the current function of each assignable button. Ü Ü 180
[Audio] Displays settings related to audio. Ü Ü
2
180
[Media] Displays information about the recording media. Ü Ü 181
[4K/2K/MXF 1/2],
[4K/2K/MXF 2/2]
Displays the settings for the video terminals and for MXF clips.
Ü –
181
[Video] – Ü
[Metadata 1/2], [Metadata 2/2] Displays the user memo and other metadata that will be recorded
with clips.
Ü – 182
[Battery/Hour Meter] Allows you to check the remaining battery time, battery life and how
long the camera has been in operation.
Ü Ü 183
[/ Data 1/3], [/ Data 2/3],
[/ Data 3/3]
3
Displays the settings for the custom picture file that will be
embedded into clips.
Ü –
183,
184
[Wi-Fi Remote 1/4] to
[Wi-Fi Remote 4/4]
4
Displays settings related to the configuration of the optional WFT-E6
Wireless File Transmitter and the Wi-Fi network setup. For more
details, download the “WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for
Canon Camcorders” (PDF file) from your local Canon Web site and
follow the instructions to complete the necessary setup.
Ü – –
179
Displaying the Status Screens
[Gamma/Color Space] Status Screen ( mode only)
* When using Canon Log gamma and [£ LCD/VF Setup] > [View Assist.] is set to [On], [Wide DR] will be displayed in the
[Gamma] column.
[Camera] Status Screen ( mode only)
1
3
4
5
2
6
7
13G-SDI terminal (A 144)
2 MON. 1 terminal (A 144, 148)
3 MON. 2 terminal (A 144, 148)
4 HD/SD SDI terminal (
A
58, 117, 148)
5 SYNC OUT terminal (A 58, 117)
6 HDMI OUT terminal/CF card recording
(A 58, 117)
7 LCD screen/viewfinder* (A 58, 117)
1
2
4
5
3
1 ISO speed/Gain increment (A 70)
2 2 Iris increment (A 74)
3 Shutter speed increment (A 68)
4 2 Correction for peripheral illumination
(A 34)
5 2 Lens model name info (A 32)
Displaying the Status Screens
180
[Assign Button 1/2], [Assign Button 2/2] Status Screen
* Assignable buttons 10 to 15 do not appear in mode.
[Audio] Status Screen
1
1
1 Assignable buttons 1 to 15* (A 111)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
9
10
In mode
In mode
1 XLR terminal recording channel (A 93)
2 Microphone sensitivity (XLR terminal) (A 95)
3 Audio peak limiter (A 94, 95)
4 Microphone mode (MIC terminal) (A 95)
5 Microphone recording level (MIC terminal) (A 95)
6 Microphone attenuator (MIC terminal) (A 96)
7 Headphone volume (A 131)
8 Linking recording levels of XLR terminals (A 94)
9 Microphone attenuator (XLR terminal) (A 95)
10 Audio reference signal (A 99)
181
Displaying the Status Screens
[Media] Status Screen
NOTES
• Depending on the recording media, the total space displayed on the screen may differ from the nominal
capacity listed on the CF card or SD card.
[4K/2K/MXF 1/2] Status Screen ( mode, 4K and 2K modes only)
1
6
4
7
8
5
9
10
11
2
3
1CF card A
2CF card B
3 SD card
4 Total space on CF card A
5 Used space on CF card A
6 Available recording time on CF card A
7 Approximate used space on CF card A
8 Total space on SD card
9 Used space on SD card
10 Available number of shots on SD card
11 Approximate used space on SD card
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1 3G-SDI terminal output status (A 41)
2 MON. terminal output status (A 147)
3 MON. terminal LUT output (A 148)
4 MON. terminal output resolution (A 147)
5 MON. terminal resizing method (A 147)
6 MON. terminal scan mode (A 147)
7 MON. 1 terminal peaking gain (A 80)
Displaying the Status Screens
182
[4K/2K/MXF 2/2] ( mode) / [Video] ( mode) Status Screen
* Appears in mode only.
[Metadata 1/2] Status Screen ( mode only)
[Metadata 2/2] Status Screen ( mode only)
2
3
4
5
6*
8*
7*
1
1 HDMI OUT terminal status
2 HD/SD SDI terminal output status and scan mode
(A 149)
3 SYNC OUT terminal output status and scan
mode (A 150)
4 HD/SD onscreen displays (A 151)
5 SD output resizing method (A 150)
6 MXF clip bit rate/resolution* (A 64)
7 MXF clip frame rate* (A 65)
8 MXF clip resizing method* (A 63)
2
1
3
4
5
1 User memo file name (A 97)
2 Clip title
3 Camera operator
4 Filming location
5 Clip description
2
1
3
1Country code (A 170)
2 Organization code
3User code
183
Displaying the Status Screens
[Battery/Hour Meter] Status Screen
[/ Data 1/3] Status Screen
( mode only)
1
2
3
4
5
1 Remaining recording time
2 Remaining battery level indicator
3 Battery life indicator
4 Total operation time (A 177)
5 Operation time since using [Reset Hour Meter]
(A 177)
1
3
2
5
6
7
8
4
9
1 Custom picture file name (A 114)
2Gamma (A 117)
3 Master pedestal (A 118)
4 Master black RGB levels (A 118)
5 Black gamma settings (level, range and point)
(A 118)
6 Knee settings (slope, point and saturation) (A 119)
7 Skin detail settings (hue, chroma, area and
Ylevel) (A 120)
8 Selective NR settings (hue, chroma, area and
Ylevel) (A 120)
9Low key saturation (A 119)
Displaying the Status Screens
184
[/ Data 2/3] Status Screen ( mode only)
[/ Data 3/3] Status Screen ( mode only)
1
3
2
5
6
7
4
1 Sharpness settings (level, horizontal detail
frequency, horizontal/vertical detail balance, and
limit) (A 119)
2 Sharpness settings (select, knee aperture gain
and slope) (A 119)
3 Level depend settings (level, slope and offset)
(A 120)
4 Coring settings (level, offset, curve and depth)
(A 119)
5Noise reduction (A 120)
6 Color matrix settings (select, gain and phase)
(A 121)
7 Color matrix settings (A 121)
1
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
1 White balance RGB gain (A 121)
2 Color correction (A 121)
3 Area A settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)
(A 121)
4 Area A revision settings (level and phase)
(A 121)
5 Area B settings (phase, chroma, area and Y level)
(A 121)
6 Area B revision settings (level and phase)
(A 121)
7 Setup level and press (A 122)
8 Clip at 100% (A 122)
185
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If you have a problem with your camera, refer to this section. Consult a Canon Service Center if the problem
persists.
Power source
The camera will not turn on or it turns off by itself.
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.
Shortly after turning it on, the camera turns off on its own.
- You are using a DC coupler or a battery pack that is not compatible for use with this camera. Use a recommended
battery pack (A 200).
Cannot charge the battery pack.
- The temperature of the battery pack is outside the charging range. If the battery pack’s temperature is below 0 °C
(32 °F), warm it before charging it; if it is above 40 °C (104 °F), let the battery pack cool down before charging it.
- Charge the battery pack in temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F).
- The battery pack is faulty. Replace the battery pack.
The battery pack is exhausted extremely quickly even at normal temperatures.
- Check the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 183) to see whether the battery pack is at the end of its service life.
If so, buy a new battery pack.
Recording
The camera’s controls are not responsive/disabled
- The plug being connected into the GRIP terminal may not be correctly connected. Make sure the plug is firmly inserted
all the way into the GRIP terminal.
- When the Q switch is set to C, all buttons except for the START/STOP button are locked* and cannot be
operated. Set the Q switch to CAMERA.
*If the [w Other Functions] > [Custom Function] > [C START/STOP] setting is on, the START/STOP button will also be
locked.
Pressing the START/STOP button will not start recording.
-Set [4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [3GI-SDI Output] to [On] to enable output from the 3G-SDI or MON. terminals.
-Set [4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [Rec Command] to [On] to enable the external recorder to be operated using the camera’s
START/STOP button.
- The camera is in lens exchange mode. Press the LENS EXCHANGE button to exit the mode.
The point where the START/STOP button was pressed does not match the beginning/end of the recording.
- There is a slight interval between pressing the START/STOP button and the actual start/end of recording. This is not a
malfunction.
The camera will not focus.
- The viewfinder is not adjusted. Use the dioptric adjustment dial to make the proper adjustment (A 36).
- The lens is dirty. Clean the lens with a soft lens-cleaning cloth.
When a subject flits across in front of the lens, the image appears slightly bent.
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors. When a subject crosses very quickly in front of the camera, the
image may seem slightly warped. This is not a malfunction.
Bright red, green or blue dots appear on the screen.
- The camera’s CMOS sensor is a delicate piece of precision engineering. Direct exposure of the sensor to ion rays or other
types of cosmic radiation may affect it and this may rarely appear as bright colored dots on the screen. This is the nature of
CMOS image sensors and does not represent a malfunction. Adjusting the black balance (A 48) may help solve the problem.
- The effects of the damage may be more noticeable when the camera is used in places subject to high temperatures,
when a high ISO speed or gain level is used and when slow shutter speeds are used.
Changing between recording (ÜREC) and record pause (STBY) takes longer than usual.
- When the CF card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your clips
(A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45). Alternatively, replace the CF card.
The camera cannot record to a CF card properly.
- This may occur as recordings are made and deleted over time. Save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
Troubleshooting
186
The camera becomes hot during use.
- The camera may become hot while shooting. This is not a malfunction.
- The camera’s internal temperature will rise if the cooling fan filter under the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover has clogged.
Replace the filter (A 197).
The built-in ND filter is stuck and does not change.
- The electronic motor that drives the ND filter may not be working correctly. As an emergency measure, you can
operate the ND filter manually (A 198). Eventually, consult a Canon Service Center.
Playing Back MXF Clips
Cannot delete a clip.
- You cannot delete clips with an $ mark. Remove the $ mark (A 134) to delete the clip.
Deleting clips takes longer than usual.
- When the CF card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your clips
(A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
Cannot delete a photo.
- The photo is protected. Remove the protection (A 163).
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.
Cannot copy clips.
- There is not enough available space on the CF card being copied to or the CF card already contains the maximum
number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 136) to free some space or replace the CF card.
Indicators and Onscreen Displays
ì appears in red on the screen.
- Battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.
í appears on the screen.
- The camera cannot communicate with the battery pack attached so the remaining battery time cannot be displayed.
The tally lamp does not illuminate.
- Set [Other Functions] > [Tally Lamp] to [On].
The tally lamp flashes quickly. (4 flashes per second)
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.
- There is not enough available space on the CF card. Delete some clips (A 136) to free some space or replace the CF
card.
- A system error has occurred. Turn off the camera and back on again. If this does not solve the problem, consult a
Canon Service Center.
The tally lamp flashes slowly. (1 flash per second)
- The combined available space on both CF cards is low. Replace the CF card that is not being recorded onto.
2 or 3 appears in red on the screen.
- There is not enough available space on the CF card. Delete some clips (A 136) to free some space or replace the CF
card.
* appears in red on the screen.
- An SD card error occurred. Turn off the camera. Remove and reinsert the SD card. Initialize the SD card if the display
does not change back to normal.
- The SD card is full. Replace the SD card or delete some photos (A 162) to free some space on the SD card.
Even after stopping recording, the CF2/CF3 access indicator stays illuminated in red.
- The clip is being recorded. This is not a malfunction.
appears in yellow on the screen.
- The camera’s internal temperature has reached a predetermined level. You can continue using the camera.
187
Troubleshooting
appears in red on the screen.
- The camera’s internal temperature has risen while appeared in yellow on the screen.
- If [Other Functions] > [Fan] is set to [On], turn off the camera and wait until the temperature has lowered.
- In mode, when [Other Functions] > [Fan] is set to [Automatic] and the cooling fan is deactivated while you are
shooting, the cooling fan will start automatically ( appears on the screen).
- The camera’s internal temperature will rise if the cooling fan filter under the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover has clogged.
Replace the filter (A 197).
appears on the screen.
- The camera and lens cannot communicate normally.
Picture and Sound
Screen displays turn on and off repeatedly.
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.
- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.
Abnormal characters appear on the screen and the camera does not operate properly.
- Disconnect the power source and reconnect it after a short time. If the problem still persists, perform one of the
following actions.
• Disconnect the power source and press the RESET button. This resets all the camera’s settings to default values
except for custom picture settings and the hour meter.
• Use the [Other Functions] > [Reset] > [All Settings] function. This resets all the camera’s settings to default values
except for the hour meter.
Video noise appears on screen.
- Keep a distance between the camera and devices that emit strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful
magnets and motors, MRI machines or high-voltage power lines.
Horizontal bands appear on the screen.
- This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors when recording under some types of fluorescent, mercury or
sodium lamps. This is not a malfunction. You may be able to reduce the symptoms by setting the shutter mode to
[Speed] and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system: 1/50* or 1/100 for
50 Hz systems, 1/60 or 1/120 for 60 Hz systems.
* May not be available depending on the frame rate.
Audio cannot be recorded.
- An external microphone connected to the XLR terminal requires phantom power. Set the XLR terminal switch to
MIC+48V (A 93).
- The camera’s MIC terminal is given priority over the XLR terminals. To record audio from the XLR terminals, be sure not
to connect any microphones to the MIC terminal.
Audio is recorded at an extremely low level.
- When using the XLR terminals: The AUDIO LEVEL switch is set to M, and the recording level is set too low. When using
the MIC terminal: [Audio Setup] > [Audio Input] > [MIC Mode] is set to [Manual] and the [MIC Level] setting is too
low. Check the audio level meter on the screen or rear panel and adjust the audio level correctly (A 94, 95).
- The microphone attenuator is on. Turn off the microphone attenuator (A 95, 96).
Sound is distorted or is recorded at lower levels.
- When recording near loud sounds (such as fireworks, shows or concerts), sound may become distorted or it may not
be recorded at the actual levels. Activate the microphone attenuator (A 95, 96), or adjust the audio recording level
manually.
Recording Media and Accessories
Cannot insert the recording media.
- The CF card or SD card you are trying to insert is not facing the correct direction. Turn it over and insert it.
Cannot record on the CF card.
- A compatible CF card must be used (A 43).
- Initialize the CF card (A 45) when you use it with the camera for the first time.
- The CF card is full or it already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 136) to free
some space or replace the CF card.
Troubleshooting
188
Cannot record on the SD card.
- Initialize the SD card (A 45) when you use it with the camera for the first time.
- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.
- The SD card is full. Delete some photos (A 162) to free some space or replace the SD card.
- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set the [Other Functions] > [Photo Numbering]
setting to [Reset] and insert a new SD card.
Recording to and playing back from a CF card is slow.
- This may occur as video is recorded/deleted over time. Save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
The optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or commercially available remote control does not work.
- Make sure that the [Other Settings] > [REMOTE Term.] setting is set to [RC-V100] when using the optional RC-V100
Remote Controller or [Standard] when using a commercially available remote control.
- When [Camera Setup] > [CINEMA Locked] is set to [On] or a custom picture file is not selected, custom picture
settings cannot be adjusted using the RC-V100. Set [CINEMA Locked] to [Off] or select a custom picture file ([C1] to
[C9]) (A 114).
- Turn off the camera, reconnect the remote controller and then turn the camera back on again.
Connections with External Devices
Video is not recorded on an external recorder.
- Make sure the camera is connected to the external recorder correctly (A 41).
- Check the external recorder’s instruction manual to make sure that the external recorder is set to receive the signal
being output by the camera.
Video noise appears on a nearby TV screen.
- When using the camera in a room where a TV is located, keep a distance between the compact power adapter and the
power or antenna cables of the TV.
Playback looks fine on the camera but there is no image on the external monitor.
- The camera is not connected correctly to the external monitor. Make sure you are using the correct connection
(A 146).
- The video input on the external monitor is not set to the video terminal to which you connected the camera. Select the
correct video input.
The camera is connected using a commercially available HDMI cable, but there is no picture or sound from the
external monitor.
- Disconnect the HDMI cable and then restore the connection or turn the camera off and then on again.
List of Messages
Refer to this section if a message appears on the screen. The messages in this section appear in alphabetical
order. For error messages related to the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter refer to the
Troubleshooting
section of the ‘WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter - Guide for Canon Camcorders’ (A 34).
Accessing CF A/CF B Do not remove
- You opened the CF card slot cover while the camera was accessing the CF card. Close the CF card slot cover.
Camera Q Lens communication error. Clean the lens’s contacts and reattach the lens.
- The camera cannot communicate with the lens. Remove the lens while making sure that dust does not accumulate on
the lens or enter the camera. Then, wipe the lens mount and lens contacts with a soft cloth.
Cannot acquire battery information
- Battery information can be displayed only for batteries bearing the Intelligent System mark.
Cannot communicate with the battery pack. Continue using this battery pack?
- You attached a battery pack that does not bear the Intelligent System mark.
- If you are using a battery pack that bears the Intelligent System mark, there may be a problem with the camera or
battery pack. Consult a Canon Service Center.
Cannot play back
- The file control information is corrupted or there was a decoder error. Turn off the camera and back on again. If this
does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot
be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins.
189
Troubleshooting
Cannot record
- Cannot record on a CF card. The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn off the
camera and back on again. Then, remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the CF card. If
this does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot
be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins.
Cannot switch CF card slots
- The SLOT SELECT button was pressed while the camera is recording. Wait until recording is finished to change the
selected CF card slot.
CF A/CF B Buffer overflow. Recording was stopped.
- The data transfer rate was too high for the CF card in use and the recording was stopped. Use a recommended card
(A 43).
CF A/CF B Cannot restore
- Could not recover data on the CF card. Save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
CF A/CF B error
- The CF card cannot be recognized or cannot be accessed. Check that the CF card is inserted correctly and not
malfunctioning.
CF A/CF B Management data is not supported and will be deleted
- This message may appear if you insert into the camera a CF card that was initialized by a Canon professional
camcorder. Check the contents of the CF card.
CF A/CF B Management file error Cannot record
- Cannot record because the camera cannot write to the file control information. This may occur if the files on the CF
card were accessed using another device. Save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
• During double slot recording, both “CF A” and “CF B” will appear in the message.
CF A/CF B Media full
- If either “CF A” or “CF B” appears in the message: CF card A or CF card B is full so recording will not start. Switch to
the CF card in the other CF card slot to record.
- If both “CF A” and “CF B” appear in the message: CF card A and CF card B are full. Delete some clips (A 136) to free
some space or replace a CF card.
CF A/CF B Media is almost full
- The amount of available space on CF card A and CF card B combined is low. Replace the CF card that is not selected.
CF A/CF B Media is not supported
- CF cards that are less than 512 MB or not UDMA-compatible cannot be used with the camera. Use a recommended
CF card (A 43).
CF A/CF B Number of clips already at maximum
- The CF card selected for recording already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Replace the CF card or
use the CF card in the other CF card slot.
- Because both CF cards reached the maximum number of clips, double slot recording is not available.
• During double slot recording, both “CF A” and “CF B” will appear in the message.
CF A/CF B Operation canceled.
- The file control information is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn off the camera and back on again. Then,
remove the CF card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the CF card. If this does not solve the problem,
consult a Canon Service Center.
• Corrupted file control information cannot be recovered. CF cards or clips with corrupt file control information cannot
be read by the Canon XF Utility software or associated plugins.
CF A/CF B Reached the recording limit for one clip. Recording was stopped.
- When recording a single clip for an extended period of time, the clip will be split into smaller video files every 2 GB (or
1 GB when recording in slow motion). This message will appear when the number of smaller video files reaches 99.
CF A/CF B Using a card that supports UDMA mode 4 or higher is recommended
- The CF card’s UDMA mode is lower than UDMA4. We recommend using a CF card that with a UDMA mode of at least
UDMA4.
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Switched
- This message appears when you use the SLOT SELECT button to switch the CF card slot in use or recording
continued from one CF card to the other.
CF AJCF B / CF BJCF A Will switch in a moment
- The CF card is almost full so recording will continue on the other CF card in approximately 1 minute.
Troubleshooting
190
CF card slot cover is open.
- The CF card slot cover was open when the camera was switched to or turned on in mode. Close the cover.
Change the battery pack
- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.
% / $ Mark Error
- Could not add a % mark or $ mark. If the message appears in mode, try adding the mark again. If that does
not work, add the mark in mode. If the message appears in mode, turn off the camera and then back
on. Then, try to add the mark again.
Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended
- The CF card cannot be used for any of the following reasons.
• A problem has occurred with the CF card.
• The camera cannot read the CF card’s data.
• The CF card was initialized using a computer.
• The CF card has been partitioned.
- Save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45).
Check the SD card
- The SD card cannot be accessed. Check that the SD card is inserted correctly and not malfunctioning.
- Due to an SD card error, photos cannot be taken or viewed. Remove and then reinsert the SD card or use a different
SD card.
Data on CF A/CF B needs recovering Attempt to recover?
- If data on the CF card is corrupted, such as when the power suddenly turned off while recording, the data must be
recovered. When this message appears, select [OK] and press SET.
Fan error
- The cooling fan may not be working properly. Consult a Canon Service Center.
File name error
- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set [Other Functions]
> [Photo Numbering] to
[Reset] and delete all the photos on the SD card (A 162) or initialize it (A 45).
Invalid operation
- The following operations cannot be performed.
• Adding a shot mark to a clip that already has a shot mark or to a clip in frame recording mode or interval recording mode.
•Adding an $ mark to clip that already has an $ mark or adding a % mark to a clip that already has a % mark.
• In mode, immediately reviewing a recording made in a special recording mode.
• Pressing the START/STOP button when there is no CF card in the camera during MXF mode.
No clips
- There are no clips on the CF card to play back. Clips must be recorded (A 51) in order to play them back.
No photos
- There are no photos on the SD card to play back. Photos must be taken (A 159) in order to view them.
No Shot Marks
- This message appears if shot marks in a clip were deleted from the [Shot Mark] index screen. Press the INDEX button
to return to the clip index screen.
Number of Shot Marks at maximum
- The shot mark could not be added because the clip already contains 100 shot marks (" and # marks combined). You
must delete shot marks (A 139) before adding any more.
Please open the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover
- The camera cannot enter 4K or 2K mode when the MON./3G-SDI terminal cover is closed. Open the cover.
Recorded at 24.00 Hz Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended.
- The CF card contains 24.00 Hz recordings. To record on this CF card, save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card
(A 45). To play back the recordings on the CF card, set [4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Frequency] to [24.00 Hz].
Recorded at 59.94 Hz/50.00 Hz Check the data on CF A/CF B Initializing the card is also recommended
- The CF card contains clips that were recorded using a system frequency other than the one currently used by the
camera. To record on this CF card, save your clips (A 154) and initialize the CF card (A 45). To play back the
recordings on the CF card, set [4K/2K/MXF Setup] > [System Frequency] to [59.94 Hz] or [50.00 Hz] as necessary, so
the camera matches the CF card.
SD card error
- You inserted a MultiMedia Card (MMC) into the camera. Use a recommended SD card (A 43).
191
Troubleshooting
Shot Mark Error
- Could not add a shot mark. If the message appears in mode, try adding the mark again. If that does not work,
add the mark in mode after you finish recording. If the message appears in mode, turn off the camera
and then back on. Then, try to add the mark again.
System error
- Turn off the camera and back on again. If this does not solve the problem, there may be a malfunction with the camera.
Consult a Canon Service Center.
This photo cannot be displayed
- You may not be able to display photos taken with other devices or image files created or edited on a computer.
Handling Precautions
192
Handling Precautions
Camera
Be sure to observe the following precautions to ensure maximum performance.
• Do not carry the camera by the LCD panel or monitor unit. Be careful when closing the LCD panel.
• Do not leave the camera in places subject to high temperatures (like the inside of a car parked under direct
sunlight), or high humidity.
• Because the camera’s temperature can rise significantly, do not hold the camera for long periods of time while
shooting.
• Do not use the camera near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors, MRI
machines or high-voltage power lines. Using the camera in such places may cause anomalies in the video or
audio or video noise to appear.
• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or sandy places. The camera is not waterproof – avoid also water,
mud or salt. If any of the above should get into the camera it may damage the camera and/or the lens. Consult
a Canon Service Center as soon as possible.
• Be careful to avoid dust and dirt particles accumulating on the lens or entering the camera. When you finish
using the camera, make sure to attach the body cap to the lens mount and the lens cap and dust cap to the
lens.
• Do not point the camera or viewfinder toward an intense light source, such as the sun on a sunny day or an
intense artificial light source. Do not leave the camera pointed at a bright subject. Internal components may
become damaged due to concentration of the light by the lens. Be careful especially when using a tripod or
shoulder strap. When you are not using the camera or viewfinder, make sure to attach the lens cap to the lens
and the viewfinder cap to the viewfinder.
• Be careful of heat generated by lighting equipment.
• Do not disassemble the camera. If the camera does not function properly, consult qualified service personnel.
• Do not touch the lens contacts on the lens mount. Dirty contacts may cause a poor
contact between the camera and the lens resulting in incorrect operation of the
camera. After removing the lens, make sure to attach the body cap to the lens mount
and the lens cap and dust cap to the lens.
• Handle the camera with care. Do not subject the camera to shocks or vibration as this
may cause damage. When using the shoulder strap, do not allow the camera to swing
and hit an object.
• To prevent equipment breakdowns and excessive heating, do not connect the supplied battery charger or
compact power adapter to voltage converters for overseas travels or special power sources such as those on
aircraft and ships, DC-AC inverters, etc.
Long-term storage
If you do not intend to use the camera for a long time, store it in a place free of dust, in low humidity, and at
temperatures not higher than 30 °C (86 °F).
193
Handling Precautions
Battery Pack
• Dirty terminals may cause a poor contact between the battery pack and the camera. Wipe the terminals with a
soft cloth.
Long-term storage
• Store battery packs in a dry place at temperatures no higher than 30 °C (86 °F).
• To extend the battery life of the battery pack, discharge it completely before storing it.
• Charge and discharge all your battery packs fully at least once a year.
Always attach the battery terminal cover.
Do not allow any metal objects to touch the terminals (figure 1), as this can
cause a short circuit and damage the battery pack. Attach the terminal cover
whenever the battery pack is not being used (figure 2).
The battery terminal cover has a [ð]-shaped hole. This is useful when you
wish to differentiate between charged and uncharged battery packs. For
example, with charged battery packs, attach the terminal cover so that the
[ð]-shaped hole shows the colored label.
Remaining battery time
If the remaining battery time displayed is not correct, charge the battery pack fully. Still, the correct time may not
be displayed if a fully charged battery pack is used continuously in high temperatures or it is left unused for long
periods of time. Also, the correct remaining time may not be displayed, depending on the battery life. Use the
time shown on the screen as an approximation.
DANGER!
Treat the battery pack with care.
• Keep it away from fire (or it might explode).
• Do not expose the battery pack to temperature higher than 60 °C (140 °F). Do not leave it near a heater or
inside a car in hot weather.
• Do not try to disassemble or modify it.
• Do not drop it or subject it to shocks.
• Do not get it wet.
Figure 1 Figure 2
Back side of the
battery pack
Uncharged
Terminal cover attached
Charged
Handling Precautions
194
Using higher capacity batteries
You can use the optional BP-970G / BP-975 battery packs with this
camera. However, as the battery compartment cover cannot be closed
when using these higher capacity battery packs, you will need to remove
it beforehand. Note that removing the battery compartment cover will
render the camera more exposed to moisture, dust and foreign objects.
1 Slide down the BATT.OPEN switch and open the battery
compartment cover.
2 Push the latch at the bottom of battery compartment.
3 Gently pull out the battery compartment cover.
Regarding the use of non-Canon battery packs
• We recommend using genuine Canon battery packs bearing the Intelligent System
mark.
• If you attach to the camera battery packs that are not genuine Canon battery packs, the remaining battery
time will not be displayed.
IMPORTANT
• To prevent equipment breakdown, do not connect the battery charger to voltage converters.
Recording Media
• We recommend backing up the recordings on the recording media onto your computer. Data may be
corrupted or lost due to defects or exposure to static electricity. Canon shall not be liable for lost or corrupted
data.
• Do not touch or expose the terminals to dust or dirt.
• Do not use recording media in places subject to strong magnetic fields.
• Do not leave recording media in places subject to high humidity and high temperature.
• Do not disassemble, bend, drop, or subject recording media to shocks and do not expose them to water.
• Check the direction before inserting the recording media. Forcing recording media into the slot if it is not
correctly oriented may damage the recording media or the camera.
• Do not attach any labels or stickers on the recording media.
• SD cards: SD cards have a physical switch to prevent writing on the card so as to
avoid the accidental erasure of the card’s content. To write-protect the SD card,
set the switch to the LOCK position.
Disposal
When you delete data on the recording media, only the file allocation table is altered and stored data is not
physically erased. Take the necessary precautions when you dispose of the recording media, for example by
physically damaging it to prevent the leakage of private data.
If giving the recording media to another person, initialize it (using the [Complete] initialization option for SD cards,
(A 45)). Fill it up with unimportant recordings, and then initialize it again. This makes recovering the original
recordings very difficult.
LOCK switch
195
Handling Precautions
Built-in Rechargeable Lithium Battery
The camera has a built-in rechargeable lithium battery to keep the date/time and other settings. The built-in
lithium battery is recharged while you use the camera; however, it will discharge completely if you do not use the
camera for about 3 months.
To recharge the built-in lithium battery: Connect the compact power adapter to the camera and use a
household power outlet to power the camera for 24 hours while it is turned off.
Maintenance/Others
196
Maintenance/Others
Cleaning
Camera Body
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body. Never use chemically treated cloths or volatile solvents such as
paint thinner.
Lens
• Remove any dust or dirt particles using a non-aerosol type blower brush.
• Use a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth to gently wipe the lens using commercially available cleaning fluid for
eyeglasses. Never use tissue paper.
LCD Screen
• Clean the LCD screen using a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth.
• Condensation may form on the surface of the screen when the temperature changes suddenly. Wipe it with a
soft dry cloth.
Viewfinder
1 Slide the viewfinder unit’s LOCK/RELEASE screw to the RELEASE position and remove the
viewfinder unit by sliding it up.
2 Wipe away dirt with a cotton swab.
3 Reattach the viewfinder unit by sliding it back onto the camera and turn back the LOCK/RELEASE
screw to the LOCK position.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to scratch the glass and screen when cleaning them.
Vi
ew
fi
n
d
er
197
Maintenance/Others
Replacing the Cooling Fan Filter
You can replace the cooling fan filter, which is located under the
cover of the MON./3G-SDI terminals.
1 Remove the cooling fan cover.
• Hold the top and bottom of the center opening and remove the
cover.
2 Remove the filter.
3 Attach the new filter.
4 Reattach the cover.
• Hook the cover behind the lower tabs as shown in the
illustration and then hook the cover behind the upper tabs.
NOTES
• Filters can be reused by washing them in water or mild detergent.
Make sure filters are completely dry before attaching them to the
camera.
• Contact a Canon Service Center to purchase replacement filters.
Condensation
Moving the camera rapidly between hot and cold temperatures may cause condensation (water droplets) to form
on its internal surfaces. Stop using the camera if condensation is detected. Continued use may damage the
camera.
Condensation may form in the following cases:
• When the camera is moved quickly from cold to warm places
• When the camera is left in a humid room
• When a cold room is heated rapidly
To avoid condensation
• Do not expose the camera to sudden or extreme changes in temperature.
• Remove the recording media and battery pack. Then, place the camera in an airtight plastic bag and let it
adjust gradually to temperature changes before removing it from the bag.
When condensation is detected
The precise time required for water droplets to evaporate will vary depending on the location and weather
conditions. As a general rule, wait for 2 hours before resuming use of the camera.
C
ooling fan
cover
Cooling
fan filter
Maintenance/Others
198
Operating the ND Filter Manually
In the rare case that the internal electronic motor that drives the ND filter malfunctions, you can operate the ND
filter manually as an emergency measure.
1 Turn off the camera and remove the lens.
2 Unscrew the screw in the illustration and remove the cover.
3 Pressing lightly, use a Phillips head screwdriver to turn the
ND filter as necessary.
• You can check the position of the ND filter through the lens
mount.
4 Return the cover and tighten the screw.
Using the Camera Abroad
Power Sources
You can use the compact power adapter to operate the camera
and to charge battery packs in any country with power supply
between 100 and 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Consult a Canon Service
Center for information on plug adapters for overseas use.
199
Optional Accessories
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories are compatible with this camera. The availability differs from area to area.
* This accessory cannot be used to power this camera directly; it can only be used to charge the battery pack.
**For tripods with 0.95 cm (3/8 in.) screws.
For our customers in the USA: Call or visit your local retailer/dealer for genuine Canon video accessories. You
can also obtain genuine accessories for your Canon camera by calling: 1-800-828-4040, Canon U.S.A.
Information Center.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.
BP-950G, BP-955,
BP-970G, BP-975
Battery Pack
CA-940N Compact
Power Adapter
CA-930 Compact
Power Adapter*
RC-V100 Remote
Controller
TA-1 00 Trip od A d ap ter T B-1 Tripod A da p te r
Base**
WFT-E6 Wireless File
Transmitter
Optional Accessories
200
Battery Packs
When you need extra battery packs, select from the following: BP-950G,
BP-955, BP-970G*, BP-975*
When you use battery packs bearing the Intelligent System mark, the camera
will communicate with the battery and display the remaining usage time
(accurate to 1 minute). You can only use and charge these battery packs with
cameras and chargers compatible with Intelligent System.
* The optional BP-970G / BP-975 Battery Pack were not originally designed for use
with this camera. Because of its size, you will not be able to close the battery
compartment cover when using one (A 194).
Charging Times
Use the supplied CG-940 Battery Charger to charge battery packs. The charging times given in the following
table are approximate and vary according to charging conditions and initial charge of the battery pack.
Recording and Playback Times
Recording and playback times given in the following tables are approximate and vary according to recording
mode and charging, recording or playback conditions. The effective usage time of the battery pack may
decrease when recording in cold surroundings, when using the brighter screen settings, etc. The typical
shooting times listed below are approximate times for shooting with repeated operations such as start/stop, and
power on/off.
2 EF lenses with lens contacts draw power from the camera to operate some functions. Effective usage
times may decrease depending on the lens used.
Other accessories attached to the camera, such as the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter, also draw
power from the camera to operate. Effective usage times will decrease when such accessories are used while
shooting.
Approximate times when shooting in 4K mode
The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached (LCD screen and viewfinder on), output from
the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI terminal on, and when simultaneously recording an MXF
clip (50 Mbps, 1920x1080, 23.98P).
BP-950G BP-955 BP-970G BP-975
245 min. 200 min. 350 min. 295 min.
Recording mode/
Resolution
Frame rate Usage time BP-950G BP-955 BP-970G BP-975
RAW / 4096x2160 59.94P Recording (maximum) 80 75 110 115
Recording (typical) 45 45 65 70
50.00P Recording (maximum) 80 80 115 125
Recording (typical) 50 50 70 75
25.00P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 55 55 75 80
24.00P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 55 50 75 80
23.98P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 50 50 75 80
BP-955 BP-975
201
Optional Accessories
Approximate times when shooting in 2K mode
The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached (LCD screen and viewfinder on), output from
the 3G-SDI terminals, MON. terminals and HD/SD SDI terminal on, and when simultaneously recording an MXF
clip (50 Mbps, 1920x1080, 23.98P).
Approximate times for MXF mode
The following are the shooting times with the monitor unit attached (LCD screen and viewfinder on) and output
from the HD/SD SDI terminal on.
TA- 100 Tripod Ad apter
The TA-100 allows you to quickly mount/unmount the
camera on/from a tripod.
Recording mode/
Resolution
Frame rate Usage time BP-950G BP-955 BP-970G BP-975
12-bit /
2048x1080
10-bit /
2048x1080
59.94P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 50 50 75 80
50.00P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 55 55 75 80
24.00P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 55 55 75 80
10-bit /
2048x1080
59.94P Recording (maximum) 85 85 120 130
Recording (typical) 50 50 70 75
50.00P Recording (maximum) 90 90 125 135
Recording (typical) 55 55 75 80
Bit rate/Resolution Frame rate Usage time BP-950G BP-955 BP-970G BP-975
50 Mbps /
1920x1080
24.00P Recording (maximum) 155 155 220 235
Recording (typical) 95 95 135 140
This mark identifies genuine Canon video accessories. When you use Canon video equipment, we
recommend Canon-brand accessories or products bearing the same mark.
Specifications
202
Specifications
C500 / C500 PL
System
• Video Configuration for 4K and 2K Modes
4K mode:
Mode: RAW, HRAW, 4K1K RAW (both 10-bit)
Resolution: 4096x2160, 3840x2160, 4096x1080, 3840x1080
Frame rate
1
: 59.94P, 29.97P, 23.98P, 50.00P, 25.00P, 24.00P
2K mode:
Mode: RGB, 4:4:4, 12-bit; RGB, 4:4:4, 10-bit; YCC, 4:2:2, 10-bit
Resolution: 2048x1080, 1920x1080
Frame rate
1
: 59.94P, 29.97P, 23.98P, 50.00P, 25.00P, 24.00P
1
Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings.
• Recording System
Movies: Video compression: MPEG-2 Long GOP;
Audio compression: Linear PCM, 16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels
File type: MXF
Photos: DCF (Design rule for Camera File system), compatible with Exif Ver. 2.3, JPEG compression
• Video Configuration (MXF recording/playback)
50 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:2, 422P@HL)
1920x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 24.00P, 23.98P
1280x720: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 24.00P, 23.98P
35 Mbps (VBR, 4:2:0, MP@HL)
1920x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P
1280x720: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P
25 Mbps (CBR, 4:2:0, MP@H14)
1440x1080: 59.94i, 50.00i, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P
• Recording Media (not included)
Movies: CompactFlash (CF) Card Type I (two slots)
Photos: SD or SDHC (SD High Capacity) memory card
2
2
Custom picture files, camera settings and user memo files can be saved on and read from the memory card as well.
• Maximum Recording Time (approximate, continuous recording)
16 GB CF Card
50 Mbps: 40 min., 35 Mbps: 55 min., 25 Mbps: 80 min.
64 GB CF Card
50 Mbps: 160 min., 35 Mbps: 225 min., 25 Mbps: 310 min.
• Image Sensor: Super-35mm-equivalent CMOS sensor, approx. 8,850,000 effective pixels (4096x2160)
• Viewfinder: 1.3 cm (0.52 in.), approx. 1,555,000 dots, 100% coverage
• Lens Mount
2 Canon EF mount compatible with Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
3 PL Lens mount without data interface terminals
Lens multiplication factor (for 35mm equivalent focal length):
Approx. 1.46 (when the horizontal resolution is 4096 or 2048)
Approx. 1.53 (when the horizontal resolution is 3840 or 1920)
•ND Filter: Built-in (Off, 2, 4 or 6 stops), motor operated
•White Balance
Custom white balance (two sets, A and B), color temperature setting (2,000K to 15,000K); two preset settings
(daylight, 5,400 K and incandescent lamp, 3,200 K)
3
that can be further fine-tuned
3
Color temperatures are approximate.
203
Specifications
• 2 Iris: 1/2-stop increments, 1/3-stop increments, fine-tuning
• ISO Speed
1-stop increments: ISO 320, ISO 400 to ISO 12800, ISO 20000, ISO 25000
4
, ISO 51200
4
, ISO 80000
4
1/3-stop increments: ISO 320 to ISO 20000, ISO 25000
4
to ISO 80000
4
•Gain:-6 dB to 30 dB, 33 dB
4
to 42 dB (3-dB increments)
0 dB to 24 dB, 33 dB
4
to 42 dB (fine-tuning in 0.5-dB increments)
4
With extended ISO/Gain range.
• Shutter Speed
Speed (1/3-stop increments, 1/4-stop increments), angle, clear scan, slow, off
• 2 Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction: Available for Canon EF lenses
5
5
Some Canon EF lenses are not compatible with peripheral illumination correction.
• Sensor Sensitivity (MXF mode, ISO 640 (0 dB), 2000 lux, 89.9% reflection)
59.94 Hz mode: F9 (1920x1080 at 59.94i) 50.00 Hz mode: F10 (1920x1080 at 50.00i)
• S/N Ratio (MXF mode, ISO 850, using Canon Log gamma)
54 dB (typical, 1920x1080, 59.94 Hz mode at 29.97P / 50.00 Hz mode at 25.00P)
• Subject Illumination (MXF mode, 24 dB, with a f/1.2 lens)
59.94 Hz mode: 0.30 lux (29.97P, shutter speed 1/30)
50.00 Hz mode: 0.25 lux (25.00P, shutter speed 1/25)
• Size of Photos
1920x1080 pixels, 1280x720 pixels (only when capturing a photo from a clip)
Terminals
• 3G-SDI Terminals 1 and 2
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced, 2.97 Gbps
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE ST 425-1
Video: Resolution: 4096x2160, 3840x2160, 4096x1080, 3840x1080
Mode: RAW (10-bit), HRAW (10-bit), 4K1K RAW (10-bit),
RGB 4:4:4 (12-bit); RGB 4:4:4 (10-bit); YCC 4:2:2 (10-bit)
Frame rate
1
: 59.94P, 29.97P, 23.98P, 50.00P, 25.00P, 24.00P
Color space: BT. 709, DCI-P3+, Cinema Gamut, BT. 2020
Embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC)
1
Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings.
• MON. Terminals 1 and 2
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced, 1.485 Gbps
SMPTE ST 292-1
Video: Resolution: 2048x1080, 1920x1080
Mode: YCC, 4:2:2, 10-bit
Frame rate
2
: 59.94i, 29.97P/PsF, 23.98P/PsF, 50.00i, 25.00P/PsF, 24.00P/PsF
Color space: BT. 709, DCI-P3+, Cinema Gamut, BT. 2020
LUT: BT. 709, Wide DR, DCI
Embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC), assistance displays
3
(magnification, peaking, zebra pattern,
onscreen markers), ACESproxy10 output (MON. 2 terminal only)
2
Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings.
3
Magnification is available for the output from both MON. 1 and MON. 2 terminals. Other assistance displays are available for
the output from the MON. 1 terminal only.
• HD/SD SDI Terminal
BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced, 1.485 Gbps
HD-SDI: SMPTE 292
Video: Resolution: 1920x1080, 1280x720
Frame rate
4
: 59.94i, 29.97 (P/PsF), 23.98 (P/PsF), 50.00i, 25.00 (P/PsF),
24.00 (P/PsF), 59.94P, 50.00P
Specifications
204
SD-SDI: SMPTE 259M
Video: Resolution: 640x480, 768x576
Frame rate: 59.94i, 50.00i
Embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC), LUT (BT. 709, Wide DR)
4
Available frame rates depend on the resolution and recording mode settings.
• HDMI OUT Terminal
HDMI connector, output only
• SYNC OUT Terminal
BNC jack, output only, 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω
Output signal: HD component video luminance signal (HD-Y), HD analog tri-level signal, Analog blackburst
signal, SD composite video
• MIC Terminal
∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -72 dBV (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB
• × (Headphone) Terminal
∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, -G to -12 dBV (16 Ω load, volume range Min to Max) / 50 Ω or less
• GENLOCK Terminal
BNC jack, input only: 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω
• TIME CODE Terminal
BNC jack, input/output
Input: 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p / 10 kΩ
Output: 1 Vp-p / 75 Ω
• REMOTE Terminal
∅ 2.5 mm stereo mini-jack
•WFT Terminal
Proprietary connector for the optional WFT-E6 Wireless File Transmitter
• GRIP Terminal
Same as the grip unit connection terminal on the C300 / C300 PL or C100 camcorder
Power/Others
• Power Supply (rated)
7.4 V DC (battery pack), 8.4 V DC (DC IN)
• Power consumption (For each mode, viewfinder/LCD screen normal brightness, HD/SD SDI output on.
For 4K and 2K modes, MON. and 3G-SDI output on, simultaneous MXF recording at 50 Mbps.)
During 4K mode, RAW, 4096x2160: 59.94P: 23.9 W, 50.00P: 22.9 W
During 2K mode, RGB444, 2048x1080: 59.94P: 20.9 W, 50.00P: 20.9 W
During MXF mode, 50 Mbps 1920x1080, 24.00P: 12.4 W
Maximum rated power consumption: 31.0 W
• Operating Temperature
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
• Dimensions (W x H x D)*
Camera unit only:
2 160 x 179 x 171 mm (6.3 x 7.0 x 6.7 in.) 3 160 x 179 x 177 mm (6.3 x 7.0 x 7.0 in.)
Configuration with monitor unit:
185 x 249 x 187 mm (7.3 x 9.8 x 7.4 in.)
Configuration with handle unit and monitor unit:
185 x 284 x 301 mm (7.3 x 11.2 x 11.9 in.)
* All dimensions are approximate.
205
Specifications
•Weight **
Camera unit only:
2 1820 g (4.0 lb.) 3 1930 g (4.3 lb.)
Camera with monitor unit, BP-955 battery pack and two CF cards:
2 2705 g (6.0 lb.) 3 2815 g (6.2 lb.)
Camera with monitor unit, handle unit, BP-955 battery pack and two CF cards:
2 2885 g (6.4 lb.) 3 2995 g (6.6 lb.)
**All weights are approximate.
Modular Units
Monitor Unit
Modular unit can be rotated 270º on its axis; includes the LCD panel, recording and playback controls, XLR
terminals and related audio controls.
•LCD Panel: Articulated panel, 270º vertical rotation, 180º lateral rotation
• LCD Screen: 10.1 cm (4.0 in.), wide, color, approx. 1,230,000 dots, 100% coverage
• CH1, CH2 Terminals
XLR jack (pin1: shield, pin2: hot, pin3: cold), 2 sets
Sensitivity
MIC setting: -60 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 600 Ω
LINE setting: 4 dBu (manual volume center, full scale -18 dB) / 10 kΩ
Microphone attenuator: 20 dB
•Weight: Approx. 645 g (1.4 lb.)
Handle Unit
Modular unit includes a cold accessory shoe and socket for 0.64 cm (1/4 in.) screws for other accessories.
•Weight: Approx. 180 g (6.3 oz.)
CA-940N Compact Power Adapter
• Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 0.72 A (100 V) – 0.39 A (240 V)
• Rated Output: 8.4 V DC, 4.1 A
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
• Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 103 x 51 x 139 mm (4.1 x 2.0 x 5.5 in.)
•Weight: 465 g (1.0 lb.)
Specifications
206
CG-940 Battery Charger
•Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 24 W
• Rated Output: 8.4 V DC, 1.5/2.0 A
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 85 x 51 x 110 mm (3.3 x 2.0 x 4.3 in.)
•Weight: Approx. 240 g (8.5 oz.)
BP-955 Battery Pack
•Battery Type
Rechargeable lithium ion battery, compatible with Intelligent System
• Rated Voltage
7.4 V DC
• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
• Battery Capacity
Typical: 5,200 mAh
Minimum: 37 Wh / 4,900 mAh
• Dimensions (W x H x D): 38.2 x 43.5 x 70.5 mm (1.5 x 1.7 x 2.8 in.)
•Weight: 220 g (7.8 oz)
W
e
i
g
h
t an
d
di
mens
i
ons are approx
i
mate.
E
rrors an
d
om
i
ss
i
ons excepte
d
.
The information in this manual is verified as of September 2015. Subject to change without notice.
207
2K mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
3G-SDI 1/2 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
4K mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4K1K RAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
A
ABB (automatic black balance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
ACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
ACESproxy10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Aperture* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 150
Assignable buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Audio peak limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Audio recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Audio recording level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Audio reference signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
B
Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Bit rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Black balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Built-in backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
C
C. Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Canon Log gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
CF card
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Recording method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Recovering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Switching CF card slots . . . . . . . . .46, 128
Check marks (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 134
CINEMA (preset custom picture) . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Cinema Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Clips, MXF
Adding an $ mark/% mark . . . .103, 134
Adding/Deleting shot marks . . . . .102, 138
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Displaying clip information . . . . . . . . . .133
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Color bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Color space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Connection to an external monitor . . . . . . . . . 146
Connection to an external recorder . . . . . . . . . 41
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Custom displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Custom functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Custom picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Custom picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
D
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
DC IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DCI gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
DCI-P3+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Developing RAW clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Direct setting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Double slot recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
E
Edge monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EF lens mount* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
EXT 1/2 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
External recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Eye cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
F
Focus-related functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Frame recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Free-run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
G
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
GENLOCK terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
H
Handle unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
HD/SD SDI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
HDMI OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Headphone terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hour meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
HRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Index
*2 only
208
I
Index screens
Changing clip thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Expand clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Shot marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Initializing recording media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Interval recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Iris* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
ISO speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
J
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Joystick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
K
Key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
L
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
LCD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Lens exchange mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
LUT (lookup table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
M
Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
MIC terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Microphone attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96
Microphone sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
MON. 1/2 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Monitor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
MXF mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
N
ND filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Non-drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
O
OK marks ($) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 134
Onscreen markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
On-set color grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 148
P
Peaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Peripheral illumination correction* . . . . . . . . . . .34
Phantom power (microphone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Photos
Copying custom picture files . . . . . . . .164
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
PL lens mount** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Playback
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
POWER switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Pre-recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
R
RAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rec run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Recording
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Relay recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remaining battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 50
Resetting all camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Resolution (frame size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Reviewing an MXF clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
RGB, 4:4:4 ( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Running mode (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
S
Safety zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Saving MXF clips to a computer . . . . . . . . . . .154
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Shooting frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Shot marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 138
Shutter speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Slow & fast motion recording mode . . . . . . . . .108
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
*2 only **3 only
209
Status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
SYNC OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 150
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
System frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
System priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 64
T
Tally lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Terminal covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
TIME CODE terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 91
Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Turning the camera on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
U
User bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
User memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
V
Vectorscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Video configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Video output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
View assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
W
Waveform monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
WFT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
White balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Wide DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Wi-Fi Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 50
X
XLR terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Y
YCC, 4:2:2 ( ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Z
Zebra pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
210
CANON CINEMA EOS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE UNITED
STATES
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. (‘Canon USA’) with respect to (a) the Canon Cinema EOS Product, and (b) the accessories
for the Canon Cinema EOS Product (if any), packaged with this limited warranty (collectively the “Products”)* and purchased in the United States. This limited
warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase. The Products are warranted to the original end-user purchaser,
when delivered in new condition in its original container, under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows: Parts: At Canon USA’s
option, defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase. Labor: For a
period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon USA’s factory service centers or designated service
facilities located in the United States. When returning Products under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of
the Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the
Products will be return-shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an
opportunity to approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Products will be returned to you
at your risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Products to you at no charge to you to an address within the United States.
This limited warranty only applies if the Products are used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as
to which items Canon USA will have no responsibility. Canon USA shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the
Products in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Products, are sold ‘AS IS’ without warranty of any kind by Canon USA,
including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such non-
Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof.
* Except for the battery pack packaged with the Products, which carries a separate ninety (90) day limited warranty.
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Products or contact the CANON
INFORMATION CENTER AT 855-CINE-EOS (855-246-3367) or on the internet at pro.usa.canon.com/support
. You will be directed to the nearest service
facility for your Products.
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Products and does not apply in the following cases:
A. Loss or damage to the Products due to abuse, mishandling, accident, improper maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow
operating, maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon USA’s user’s manual;
B. If the Products are defective as a result of leaking batteries, sand, dirt or water damage;
C. If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon USA) that cause damage to the Products or that
cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems;
D. If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon USA’s factory service centers or authorized service facilities;
E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Products;
G. If the Product has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Products purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or
consumables not originally packaged with the Product. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a permanent record of your purchase. This
card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or Product recall under applicable laws or regulations.
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THE PRODUCTS AFTER THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS SHALL BIND CANON USA (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON USA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF
REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICE, STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS’ HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON
WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON USA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY
OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON USA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCTS SOLD BY CANON USA AND CAUSING THE
ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND
YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS NOT CAUSED
DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE
OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCTS OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
CANON U.S.A., INC
USA
&N Z
211
CANON CINEMA EOS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA
The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon Canada Inc. (‘Canon Canada’) with respect to (a) the Canon Cinema EOS product, and (b) the
accessories for the Canon Cinema EOS Product (if any), packaged with this limited warranty (collectively the “Products”)* and purchased in Canada. This
limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase. The Products are warranted to the original end-user
purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original container, under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows: Parts: At
Canon Canada’s option, defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original
purchase. Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon Canada’s factory service
center or designated service facilities located in Canada. When returning Products under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you
must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period,
repairs will be made and the Products will be return-shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an
estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made
and the Products will be returned to you at your risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Products to you at no charge to you to an
address within Canada.
This limited warranty only applies if the Products are used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible software, as to
which items Canon Canada will have no responsibility. Canon Canada shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty for use of the
Products in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand peripheral equipment and
software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Products, are sold ‘AS IS’ without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada,
including any implied warranty or condition regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such
non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof.
* Except for the battery pack packaged with the Products, which carries a separate ninety (90) day limited warranty.
In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Products or contact the CANON
PROFESSIONAL SERVICE CENTRE 1-800-667-2666 or on the internet at www.canon.ca/pro
. You will be directed to the nearest service facility for your
Products.
This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Products and does not apply in the following cases:
A. Loss or damage to the Products due to abuse, mishandling, accident, improper maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to follow
operating, maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon Canada’s user’s manual;
B. If the Products are defective as a result of leaking batteries, sand, dirt or water damage;
C. If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon Canada) that cause damage to the Products or
that cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems;
D. If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon Canada’s factory service centers or authorized service facilities;
E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;
F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Products;
G. If the Product has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.
This Limited Warranty does not apply to Products purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables not
originally packaged with the Product. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures
that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or Product recall under applicable laws or regulations.
NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THE
PRODUCTS AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON,
FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS SHALL BIND CANON CANADA (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON
CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SERVICE, STORAGE
CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCTS’
HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCTS, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON CANADA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON CANADA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF
THE PRODUCTS SOLD BY CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK
AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE,
MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON CANADA (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCTS OR THE PERSON FOR
WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from province to province.
CANON CANADA INC.
CANADA
© CANON INC. 2015 PUB. DIE-0441-001B
Visit your local Canon Web site to download the latest version of this Instruction Manual.
ASIA and HONG KONG, S.A.R.
Canon Hongkong Company Ltd
19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
+852 3191 2333, +852 2428 3963
AUSTRALIA http://www.canon.com.au
Canon Australia Pty Ltd
13-13-83 (within Australia only)
(61) 02-9805-2555
CANADA http://www.canon.ca/pro
CANON CANADA INC.
❖
Professional Product Support /
Soutien des produits professionnels
(800) 667-2666
CENTRO Y SURAMÉRICA http://www.cla.canon.com
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
MÉXICO http://www.canon.com.mx
CANON MEXICANA, S DE RL DE CV
52 (55) 5249-4905
NEW ZEALAND http://www.canon.co.nz
Canon New Zealand Ltd
0800-222-666 (within New Zealand only)
(64) 09-489-0300
SINGAPORE
Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower,
Singapore 098632
(65) 6799 8888, (65) 6799 8882
UNITED KINGDOM
Canon UK Ltd
CCI Service Centre, Unit 130, Centennial Park,
Borehamwood, Hertfordshire, WD6 3SE
0844-369-0100
USA http://pro.usa.canon.com
CANON U.S.A., INC.
http://pro.usa.canon.com/support
(855) CINE-EOS (855-246-3367)
(USA only)
Canon Inc.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON Europa N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands http://www.canon-europe.com
